T-Mobile Sidekick Owner's Manual

T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
Release 1.0c
April 15, 2003
Copyright © 2002-2003. Danger, Inc. All rights reserved.
Confidential material of Danger, Inc., 124 University Avenue, Palo Alto, CA 94301
May not be duplicated or copied without the prior written consent of Danger, Inc.
Contents
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
Contents
1. Start Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Thank You for Purchasing a T-Mobile Sidekick! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Your T-Mobile Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Charging Your Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Using the Carrying Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Use Your Device Safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Contacting Customer Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
FCC Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2. Device Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parts of Your T-Mobile Sidekick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Device Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel
................................................................
Terminology Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headset/Camera Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Infrared Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
USB Mini-B Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typing and Navigating in Text Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
14
14
17
18
19
22
22
25
25
25
26
26
3. About Your SIM Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Is a SIM Card? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exactly What Information Is on My Device SIM? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
My SIM Card Came Locked! How Do I Unlock It? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Can I Remove My SIM? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How Do I Handle My SIM? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Happens If I Lose My SIM? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Happens If I Put A Different SIM in My Device? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27
27
27
28
28
29
29
29
4. Customizing Your Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Settings Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AutoText . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery & Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Date & Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key Guard & Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30
30
33
34
35
37
38
39
43
44
45
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
2
Contents
System Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Wireless Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
5. The Jump Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About the Jump Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Find the Jump Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Application Splash Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Select an Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Jump Screen Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
48
48
49
49
49
50
6. Browsing the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Browser Splash Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigation/View Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Go To a Web Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Go to Your Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Search the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use Bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
See Recently-Viewed Web Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refresh a Web Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stop a Web Page from Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Web Browser Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51
51
51
52
52
53
53
53
54
55
56
56
56
57
7. Making Phone Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phone Splash Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Title Bar Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manage Your Speed Dial List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headset or Handset? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Place a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features While on a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Answer a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
End a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Your Call Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Listen to Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phone Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
59
59
60
60
60
62
62
63
65
67
67
68
70
70
8. Instant Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instant Messaging Splash Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add a Screen Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sign On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sign Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch Screen Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74
74
75
75
76
77
77
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
3
Contents
Remove Existing Screen Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Buddy List Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manage Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manage Buddies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IM Conversations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set an Away Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instant Messaging Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.....................
.....................
.....................
.....................
.....................
.....................
.....................
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
77
78
79
80
82
83
84
9. Email Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
The Email Splash Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Browse Email Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
View Your Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Move Messages to Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Send Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Add Email Senders to the Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Add Email Recipients to the Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Discard Email Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Manage Your Email Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Send a Photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Manage Email Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Email Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Space Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
10. Phone Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phone Messages Splash Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Browse Messages Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Text Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sort Text Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Send Text Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Text Message Senders to the Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Back Sender of a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discard Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Retrieve Messages from the Trash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Phone Messages Ringtones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
108
108
109
110
110
110
111
112
113
114
114
115
115
11. Keeping Contacts in the Address Book. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Address Book Splash Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How Much Information Can I Store? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Browse Contacts Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T-Mobile Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filter Contacts by Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sort Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
116
116
117
117
117
117
118
119
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
4
Contents
Create a Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit a Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discard/Retrieve a Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact a Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Find a Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Empty the Address Book Trash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Address Book Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
119
121
121
121
122
122
123
12. Scheduling Events with Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calendar Splash Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create an Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Move an Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit an Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discard an Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ways to View Your Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Upcoming View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Day View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Week View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Month View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Year View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trash View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Go To a Specific Day . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
127
127
128
128
131
132
132
132
134
135
136
137
138
138
139
13. Taking Photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Camera Splash Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Insert the Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Capture Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Take a Photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Your Photo Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Email Photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change the Name of a Photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sort Photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discard Photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
140
140
141
141
142
142
143
145
145
146
146
14. Keeping To Do Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Do Splash Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Browse Tasks Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Task Details Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create a New Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit a Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mark a Task Completed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Task Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discard a Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manage Your To Do Trash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
147
147
148
148
149
149
150
150
151
151
151
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
5
Contents
15. Keeping Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Notes Splash Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Your Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sort Your Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add a Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit a Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discard a Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manage Your Notes Trash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
153
153
154
154
155
156
156
156
157
16. Playing Rock & Rocket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rock & Rocket Splash Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Happens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
158
158
158
159
159
159
159
17. Playing UI Evolution Arcade Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Arcade Splash Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bubbles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Code Monkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shuffle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lab Ratz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
160
160
161
162
163
164
18. The Desktop Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signing In To the Desktop Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
More About the Applications on the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signing Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
166
166
167
167
168
168
19. Sending Email from the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening Email on the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Your Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Your Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Send a New Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attach Photos and Files to a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Web Email Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Collect Mail from POP3 Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Move Messages to Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discard Email Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
169
169
170
170
172
173
174
178
180
180
181
20. Using Address Book on the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Opening Address Book on the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Browse Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
6
Contents
How Many Contacts Can I Store? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Browse Contacts Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Address Book Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add a Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit a Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discard/Retrieve a Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Import Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communicate with a Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Empty the Trash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
183
183
184
188
190
191
192
193
193
21. Using Calendar on the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening Calendar on the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View an Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add an Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit an Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discard an Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manage Your Trash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Import Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
194
194
196
197
199
199
202
202
203
204
22. Camera Gallery on the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening Camera Gallery on the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sort Your Photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rename Your Photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discard a Photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attach Photo(s) to an Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
205
205
206
206
206
207
23. Keeping a To Do List on the Web. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening To Do on the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About To Do Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Browse Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add a New Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit a Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mark a Task as Complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discard a Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discard Completed Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manage Trash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
208
208
209
209
210
210
210
210
210
211
24. Keeping Notes on the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening Notes on the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Browse Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add a Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit a Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discard a Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manage Your Trash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
212
212
212
213
213
213
214
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
7
Contents
25. Settings on the Web. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening Settings on the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Account Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
215
215
216
216
8
Start Here
1. Start Here
This chapter leads you through the basic steps of getting started with your new T-Mobile device:
• Thank You for Purchasing a T-Mobile Sidekick!
on page 9
• Your T-Mobile Account on page 10
• Charging Your Battery on page 11
• Using the Carrying Case on page 12
• Use Your Device Safely on page 13
• Contacting Customer Care on page 13
• FCC Compliance on page 13
Thank You for Purchasing a T-Mobile Sidekick!
Here’s what you’ll find in the box:
• T-Mobile Sidekick
• SIM card
• Battery charger
• Headset
• USB cable (Mini-B type)
• Wrist strap
• Carrying case
• Start Here Guide
• Reference Guide
• T-Mobile service introduction guide
If you find that anything is missing, please contact T-Mobile Customer Care by calling 1-800-937-8997, or by
going to www.t-mobile.com/help/.
Before you can start using your device, you must set up your T-Mobile account. Read the following topics to find
out how.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
9
Start Here
Your T-Mobile Account
Before you can use your device, your T-Mobile account must be completely set up. This involves the following:
1
Obtain a telephone number.
When you purchased your device, a T-Mobile representative assigned you a telephone number, which is
stored on your device’s Subscriber Identification Module, or “SIM” for short. (Read more in About Your SIM
Card on page 27.) This step you’ve already completed.
2
Wait for account activation.
T-Mobile must activate your device on the network. This can take up to 48 hours after you purchase your
device, but usually takes much less time. You will know your T-Mobile account is activated when you see a
“Welcome to T-Mobile” screen on your device display.
3
Register a username and password.
After you see the Welcome screen on your device, follow the prompts to select a username and password.
You will use your phone number and this password to sign in and out of the Web version of the applications,
and you may occasionally be prompted to enter your username/password information on the device as well.
When selecting a username and password, note the following:
4
-
Usernames - Must start with an alphabetic character (A-Z), can include numbers, can include
underscores but no other punctuation, and must be two or more characters in length. If your preferred
username is already taken, the T-Mobile service will provide you with alternate suggestions. You can
either pick one of these or try another one of your choice. Note that usernames are not case-sensitive.
-
Passwords - Must contain 4-15 characters, can include both letters and numbers, but no spaces,
single quotes ('), semicolons (;), backslashes (\),or percent signs (%). You will be asked to type your
password twice for confirmation. Note that your password appears on the screen as asterisks (*) to
ensure privacy. Select a password that is not a word, is difficult to guess, but one that you can
remember. Passwords are case-sensitive. If you forget your password at some time in the future,
contact T-Mobile Customer Care at 1-800-937-8997.
Select and answer a secret question.
You will also be asked to select a “secret question” and type the answer. Questions are similar to these:
• What is your mother's maiden name?
• What is your favorite pet's name?
• On what street did you grow up?
• In what city did you grow up?
• What is your favorite movie?
If you ever forget your password, you will be asked to answer this question before your password is “reset”
by Customer Care.
5
Read and agree to Danger Service and End-User License Agreement.
The legal document you must read and agree to can be found on the screen (select the View License
button) and in one of the printed guides you received in the box when you bought your device. For future
reference, you can view the license agreement on the device by pressing the Jump button, then pressing the
Menu button. From the menu, select Copyrights & Credits. From the Copyrights & Credits screen, press the
Menu button and select View License. In addition, the most recent version of this document can be found at
the following Web site: www.danger.com/agreements.
6
Wait while data is being transmitted.
After agreeing to the Danger Service and End-User License Agreement, the registration information is sent to
the T-Mobile service. If your username has already been taken, you’ll be notified on a screen that gives you
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
10
Start Here
opportunity to select a new one. You’ll then see a Congratulations screen, letting you know that you are now
ready to use the T-Mobile services. There is a chance that the data transmission may fail, in which case you’ll
receive a message asking you to try later.
7
Congratulations!
Once your account has been set up, you’ll see the Congratulations screen and a final screen with the Start
button. Select the Start button to do just that! If you’re roaming on another network, you’ll be notified at this
point (see Warning below).
8
Read the Hints screens.
Before going to the Jump screen, take a minute to read the helpful hints that appear. After reading each hint,
select Next to advance to the next. Select Done to dismiss the hints and go to the Jump screen.
Warning! When roaming outside the T-Mobile network, you may incur additional charges for data transfer with
or without taking any actions, such as receiving emails. To avoid additional charges while roaming, go to Jump
Settings > Wireless Options and clear the GPRS Data Roaming On check box. If you do roam with GPRS
Data Roaming off, you will still be able to make and receive voice calls.
Charging Your Battery
When you first receive your device, the battery will be fully charged, but in deep sleep. To wake it, connect your
device to the charger.
Your device comes with a built-in rechargeable lithium ion (Li-Ion) battery. Note that you cannot access or
remove the battery from your device.
Read the following topics for more information about your device’s battery:
•
•
•
•
Charging Your Device’s Battery
Battery Charging Time
Use and Standby Times
Conserving Battery Power
Charging Your Device’s Battery
To charge the battery, do the following:
1
Attach the battery charger to your device.
Locate the battery charger that came with your device. Insert the charger lead (the small round end of the
adapter) into your device’s power jack (the small round hold located at the top of your device) and plug the
adapter cord into a standard 120V AC electrical wall outlet.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
11
Start Here
While the charger is connected to your device, a lightning bolt will display over the battery icon in the title
bar.
2
Let the device charge for at least four (4) hours to ensure maximum battery life.
Rest the device in a safe place and let the battery charge for at least four hours, or overnight. As the device
is charging, you will see the bars in the battery icon fill repeatedly from left to right in an animated fashion.
When your device is fully-charged, the bars will stop moving in the full position:
.
Note: If your battery is fully-charged and you unplug the battery charger then connect it to the charger
again, the bars in the battery icon will fill from left to right for two hours, even though it is fully-charged.
Battery Charging Time
Initial charging time for your device’s lithium ion battery is approximately four hours. Recharging time is the
same, depending on how discharged the battery has become.
If your battery has become completely discharged, your device will turn off automatically. Once you connect the
device to the battery charger, give your device approximately 10 minutes to gain enough power to be turned on.
Use and Standby Times
With a fully-charged battery, you can use your device for one day. In power-saving (or even key guard) mode,
the battery should last seven days. These times are approximate however; battery operation times vary
according to how you use your device, signal conditions, and other network settings made by T-Mobile. To view
your battery consumption, open the Jump screen menu, select Settings, then Battery & Backlight. Note that
this reading is approximate. Read more in Battery & Display on page 35.
Conserving Battery Power
Your device has a power-saving feature that automatically reduces power to the device after a user-configurable
number of minutes of inactivity. In power-saving mode your device will still receive messages and calls. To wake
the device, simply press any control button or key. Note that you must have enabled Key Guard before your
device will go into power-saving mode automatically. Read more in Battery & Display on page 35.
You can also conserve battery power by signing out of Instant Messaging when you are not using the
application. If you are really concerned about saving battery and can detach from the network, open the device
Settings screen, select the Wireless Options... button, then on the dialog box that appears, select the Wireless
Off option.
Using the Carrying Case
Use the carrying case included in your box to both protect the screen and carry your device securely.
Remember! The best way to protect the screen from scratches and other damage is to always carry the
device in the case!
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
12
Start Here
Use Your Device Safely
While using your device, please remember to follow the safety rules listed below.
• Do not use your device while driving a vehicle. If you must use your device, pull off the road
to a safe spot first.
• Turn off your device while on an aircraft. Because wireless devices interfere with navigation
systems, FCC regulations prohibit use of your device in the air. Please follow airline rules and switch off
your device when directed.
• Turn off your device while in a hospital. Adhere to posted signs in hospitals, where an active
wireless device could interfere with hospital equipment and pacemakers.
• Use only approved device batteries and accessories. Please do not insert or connect
incompatible products to your device. Do not taunt your device.
• Turn off your device while at a fueling station or near blasting. Do not use wireless
devices near fuel or other chemicals. Follow posted restrictions at these sites.
To turn off your device when required, press and hold the keyboard On/Off Power key for four seconds.
To turn off the radio, press the Jump button, then press Menu
and select Settings. Select the Wireless
Options... button, then on the dialog box that appears, select the Wireless Off option.
Warning! The hinge in the swivel display lid is assisted by a very strong magnet. Be careful to keep the device
away from magnetically sensitive items, such as credit cards and floppy disks.
Contacting Customer Care
T-Mobile’s Customer Care offers responsive and knowledgeable customer support 24 hours a day, seven days a
week. It’s a free call anytime. Dial 611 using your device or 1-800-937-8997 from any other phone.
You an also contact Customer Care through our Web site, by email, or regular mail:
Web site:
www.t-mobile.com/help/
Email:
[email protected]
Regular mail:
T-Mobile Customer Care
P.O. Box 37380
Albuquerque, NM 87176-7380
FCC Compliance
TESTED TO COMPLY WITH FCC STANDARDS. FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE.
For body worn operation, this phone has been tested and meets the FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with
accessories supplied or designated for this product. Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with the
FCC RF exposure guidelines.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
13
Device Basics
2. Device Basics
Read the topics in this chapter to get a quick understanding of how your device operates:
• Parts of Your T-Mobile Sidekick on page
14
• Device Display on page 14
• Keyboard on page 18
• Control Buttons on page 19
• Wheel on page 22
• Terminology Used in This Manual on page
22
•
•
•
•
•
Headset/Camera Jack on page 25
Power Jack on page 25
Infrared Port on page 25
USB Mini-B Port on page 26
Typing and Navigating in Text Fields on
page 26
Parts of Your T-Mobile Sidekick
The illustration below identifies the basic parts of your device.
Each part is described in more detail in the topics below.
Device Display
Your device comes with a swivel display lid that covers the keyboard in the closed position. Even when closed,
the LCD faces up and the control buttons are exposed, so you can use your device. When you open the display
lid (by rotating it clockwise), the display automatically flips 180-degrees. Read more details below.
Warning! The hinge in the swivel display lid is assisted by a very strong magnet. Be careful to keep the device
away from magnetically sensitive items, such as credit cards and floppy disks.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
14
Device Basics
Opening and Closing the Display
1
To open the display, place your left thumb on the lower-left corner and your right forefinger on the upperright corner of the display and gently push in a clockwise direction. The display will spring smoothly into
position:
2
To close the display, reverse the motion to pivot the lid counter-clockwise and lock it into the closed
position.
Standard Display Screen Indicators
The display screen is your view into the T-Mobile applications, so what you see on the screen depends on what
application you are using. However, there are some standard indicators that display on the screen at all times.
These indicators are located at the top of the screen in the area circled in the example below.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
15
Device Basics
Screen identifier. Lets you know what application screen you are currently viewing.
Current date and time.
Battery charge. The more bars that fill the battery icon, the more power in the battery.
Battery charging. When your device is connected to the battery charger, a lightning
bolt icon displays over the battery icon and the bars in the battery move from left to
right. You’ll know the battery is full-charged when the lightning bold icon disappears
and the battery bars stay in the full position.
When your device is too hot, this thermometer indicator flashes over the battery.
When your device is too cold, this thermometer indicator flashes over the battery.
Wireless signal strength. The more signal bands showing, the stronger the signal
strength of the wireless connection at your current location.
No wireless connection. If you see this X over the radio tower icon, it means you have
temporarily lost network connection.
Connectivity status indicators. Animated one dot = connected to the GPRS network,
trying to get IP address; animated two dots = obtained IP address, connecting to data
server; animated three dots = connected to data server; signing in; = signed in and
connected to data service; ready to go!
Full data and voice service available.
Voice-only(GSM) service available.
You are roaming on wireless services but have GPRS data roaming turned off on the
Jump Settings > Wireless Options screen.
You have turned off your wireless connection from the Jump Settings > Wireless
Options screen.
Your SIM card has a problem, which is prohibiting access to wireless services.
You can read about other indicators and icons in the chapters describing each application.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
16
Device Basics
Notifications
When you receive a new email, text message, instant message, or voice mail message, the service will give you
a visual notification in the title bar, no matter what application you’re currently viewing. Here’s an example of a
new email notification:
The notice will appear in a balloon just once. But, until you read or listen to your new message, you’ll see a little
icon in the title bar, reminding you that there’s a message waiting:
In the example above, there’s an email message waiting to be read. Other icons you might see notify you of the
following:
New
New
New
New
email waiting.
text message (SMS) waiting.
instant message (IM) waiting.
voice message waiting.
If you have more than one reminder, the relevant message icons will display in sequence.
You can also choose to be notified of new messages using ringtones. Read more about ringtone notifications in
the following topics:
• Set Up Phone Ringtones
• Edit a Buddy (Use to specify buddy-specific IM rings.)
• Play Buddy Alert Rings (Use to specify default IM rings.)
• Set Up Email Ringtones
• Setting Phone Messages Ringtones
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
17
Device Basics
Turning on Backlighting
To help you use your device in a dark environment, enable the automatic backlighting feature:
1
From the Jump screen, open the menu and select Settings.
2
Scroll down and select Battery & Display.
3
In the Backlight section of the screen, select the Automatically turn on when in use check box.
Note for color devices: To use the device’s light meter while the backlight is on, select the Use light meter
to adjust brightness check box.
4
Select the length of time you want backlighting to stay on from the Turn on after pop-up menu.
5
Press Jump
to return to the Jump screen.
Now, when you press any button or key on your device, or flip open the screen, backlighting will turn on for the
set amount of time. Note that as long as you press a key or button before the set time elapses, the backlight will
stay on.
Tip: Even if you have not enabled automatic backlighting, you can still quickly turn on backlighting by pressing
Menu
+ Back
to open the Controls. The backlight turn on and remain on for the time specified in the
Backlight pop-up menu.
Keyboard
Your device keyboard contains five rows of keys, including a key for the “at” symbol (@) and a Directional pad
(“D-pad”) that “rocks” into eight different directions or positions. The topics below describe the keyboard in more
detail.
Directional Pad (D-Pad)
The D-pad is the round navigational device in the lower-right corner of the keypad that you can “rock” in eight
directions: up, down, left, right, plus the 4 corners (northwest, northeast, southwest, and southeast), which you
use by pressing two adjacent keys at the same time. You use the D-pad to navigate while playing games and to
navigate within text boxes. A text box is an area on the screen in which you can type characters. Here’s a couple
examples of text boxes:
• To, From, Subject fields in an email, IM, or Phone Messages message
• Go To dialog box in the Web Browser
Press the up/down and left/right arrows to move in those directions among characters in a text box. Press the
corners of the D-pad (two adjacent arrows at the same time) to jump up/down one line and forward/backward
a character. Read more in Typing and Navigating in Text Fields on page 26.
ALT Key
You type special characters (shown in red on some of the keys) by first pressing the ALT key, then the key
showing the special character. For example, if you need to type a semicolon (;), you would first press the ALT
key, then the J key. (This action is also represented in the user documentation as ALT, J.)
• Lock the ALT key to type a series of special characters by pressing the key twice.
• Unlock the ALT key by pressing it once again.
Note! You can also lock the Shift key by pressing it twice. Unlock by pressing once again.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
18
Device Basics
Read about how text cursors change when using the ALT or Shift keys in The Text Cursor on page 26.
@ Key
When you type an email address, you use the “at” symbol (@) to separate the username from the domain; for
example, [email protected]. Use the @ key (located in the bottom row of keys) to insert the @ symbol in
an email address easily.
On/Off Button
Power off the device to conserve the maximum amount of power. While the power is off, your device will not
receive messages or phone calls. Incoming calls are forwarded to voice mail.
To power your device on and off, use the On/Off button. It is located just to the left of the “Z” key on the
keyboard and is marked with the universal symbol for power:
.
Control Buttons
Your T-Mobile device comes with four main control buttons, which you can still use when the display lid is in the
closed position, as shown below:
Read more details about the control buttons in the topics below.
Menu Button
The Menu button is located in the upper-left corner of the device and is marked by a diamond. When you see the
diamond
on the device screen or in the documentation, this refers to the Menu button. Use the Menu button
to do the following:
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
19
Device Basics
• Press Menu
Press Menu
once to open a drop-down menu listing actions you can take from the current screen:
again to close the drop-down menu.
• With a menu open, press and hold Menu
while rotating the wheel one click down to jump to the last
menu item; rotate one click up to jump to the top item.
• On any screen where you can scroll, press and hold Menu
screen, rather than line-by-line.
• Press Menu
keys:
while rotating the wheel to scroll screen-by-
in combination with a shortcut key to perform an action. There are two types of shortcut
- User-definable - Read more in Jump Shortcuts on page 38.
- System-defined - You’ll find the system-defined shortcuts listed in the menus to the right of a given
option. For example, in the Email application, the shortcut for composing a new message is Menu
+
N.
About Context Menus - The options that appear in any given menu are dependent on what screen you are
viewing. These types of menus are often referred to as “context menus”. For example, if you are viewing the
main screen of the Email application, the menu will list options such as “New Message” and “Check for New
Email”. However, if you are viewing the main screen in the Address Book, the menu will list options such as “New
Contact”, “Sort...”, and “My Info”. So the items that appear depend on the “context” (or screen) you are in when
you open the menu.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
20
Device Basics
Jump Button
The Jump button is located in the lower-left corner of the device and is marked by a circle. When you see the
circle
on the device screen or in the documentation, this refers to the Jump button. Use the Jump button to
open the Jump screen. No matter where you are in the applications--what screen you are viewing--if you press
the Jump button, you’ll return to the Jump screen, with the Phone application highlighted:
Rotate the wheel to scroll through the applications. To go to an application you have highlighted, press the
wheel.
Read more in the Wheel on page 22 and The Jump Screen on page 48.
Back Button
The Back button is located in the lower-right corner of the device and is marked by a cross. When you see the
cross
on the device screen or in the documentation, this refers to the Back button. Use the Back button to do
the following:
• Press Back
once to go back to the screen you were previously viewing; press twice to go back two
screens, and so on.
• In a dialog box or on a screen, press Back once to save any changes you’ve made to the information. If
you’ve made changes within a dialog box, the dialog box closes as well.
• If a menu is open, press Back
April 15, 2003
once to close it.
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
21
Device Basics
Wheel
The wheel is located in the upper-right corner of your device. You use it to highlight and press buttons or links on
the screen. Use your thumb to rotate the wheel away from you (up) or toward you (down), moving through
selectable items. You can also press the wheel down. More specifically, here’s how you can use the wheel:
• Rotate the wheel toward you to advance the current selection through all the “selectable” elements on
a screen and scroll down a Web page.
• Rotate the wheel away from you to reverse through all the “selectable” elements on a screen and to
scroll up a Web page.
• Press down on the wheel (as you would a mouse button) to select a highlighted item or open a pop-up
menu.
• Press and hold the wheel to open pop-up context menus.
Terminology Used in This Manual
The instructions in this manual use many terms that may be confusing. To help you understand exactly what the
instruction is telling you to do, we’ve included some definitions:
Term
What It Means
Action button
A button that contains a word or phrase
describing what will happen if you select
(press) the button. Action buttons often
contain the keyboard shortcut as well.
Check box
A small box that is either checked or clear
(does not contain a check mark). If you
check a check box, the action described next
to the box will turn “on”. Clearing the check
box will turn the action “off”.
Context menu
A context menu contains only the actions
that you can take on the item you are
highlighting. In regular menus, the actions
you cannot take on the current screen are
dimmed, but in a context menu, these
actions don’t appear at all.
April 15, 2003
Example
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
22
Device Basics
Term
What It Means
Dialog box
A dialog box is a floating window that
presents you with buttons and options that
allow you to make decisions and carry out
actions.
Highlight
This action is only applicable on your device.
All “selectable” elements can be highlighted
by rotating the wheel then stopping over the
item. Once highlighted, the element’s
appearance changes to reverse video.
Example
In the example to the right, 3 - Janey is
highlighted.
Keyboard
shortcuts
Keyboard shortcuts are presented in the
documentation as follows:
+ K = Press the Menu button and hold
while pressing the K key.
,
= Press the Menu button first, then
the Back button (in succession).
So, if two keys or buttons are separated by a
plus sign (+), you press them simultaneously
to make the action occur; if they’re
separated by a comma (,), then you press
one after the other.
Menu
A floating window containing a list of actions
you can take on the screen. Press the Menu
button to open this list of actions.
Option (button)
Choices presented to you, usually in a dialog
box. You can only select one of the options
and do so by pressing the wheel once the
option is highlighted. (Note: Sometimes
these are called “radio buttons”.)
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
23
Device Basics
Term
What It Means
Example
Pop-up menu
A menu that pops open (“up”) when
selected. Once the menu is open, you can
rotate the wheel to highlight an item, then
press to select it.
Pop-up menu that’s closed:
Press
To press, you push down and quickly release
the wheel, key, or control button. It’s the
same action you take when you click a
mouse button while using your computer.
Before you can press an item on the screen
(such as an OK button, menu option, check
box, or list item) you must rotate the wheel
to “highlight” the item so it appears in
reverse video. Pressing the highlighted item
“selects” it.
Press & hold
Push down on a key or control button and
hold it down for at least one second.
Rotate
Used to describe the push wheel’s rotational
movement. You can rotate the push wheel
up (away from you) or down (toward you).
Select
Refers to the action you take to take an
action on a screen element, such as selecting
an action button or option button, or
pressing a contact name to open it for edit.
Slider bar
A control that lets you set a value from a
continuous range of possible values, such as
screen contrast/brightness or sound volume.
Text field (or
text box)
A rectangular area in which you can type or
edit text. To make a text field editable, you
must first highlight the field by rotating the
wheel, then press to make it editable.
Pop-up menu that’s open:
In the example to the right, the name of the
photo is in an editable text field.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
24
Device Basics
Headset/Camera Jack
The jack where you insert your headset or camera is located on the right side of the device. See illustration in
Parts of Your T-Mobile Sidekick on page 14. Be sure to press the headset or camera lead in firmly to secure the
connection:
Warning! Be sure to remove the camera from the jack when you’re not using it; especially when you’re storing
your device in a backpack, pocket, bag, or purse.
Power Jack
The power jack is located at the top of your device, as shown in the illustration below. Read more in Charging
Your Battery on page 11.
Infrared Port
You’ll find an infrared port on the back of your device, to the right of the power jack shown in the illustration
above. In a future release, the infrared port will be used for beaming information between devices.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
25
Device Basics
USB Mini-B Port
The USB Mini-B port is located on the top of your device, just to the left of the power jack as shown in the
illustration below. Use the USB Mini-B port with your USB cable to connect your device to a personal computer
for restoring the device operating system software.
Typing and Navigating in Text Fields
Many of the T-Mobile applications have screens in which you type text, such as the Email Compose screen, the
individual Settings screens, the Browser’s Go To dialog box, etc. You will primarily use the keyboard to type text,
which is easy to use, but here are some hints to make typing, editing, and navigating in text fields easier:
• Use the Directional Pad to navigate within a text box:
- Press the up/down and left/right arrows to move in those directions among characters in a text box.
- Press the ALT button while using the D-pad up and down arrows to jump to the top or bottom of a text
field.
- Press the ALT button while using the D-pad left and right arrows to jump to the beginning and end of a
line of text.
• To delete a character to the left of the cursor, press the DEL key
• To delete a character to the right of the cursor, press SHIFT +
• To delete all the characters on one line, press ALT +
.
.
.
• To delete all the characters in a text box, press ALT + SHIFT +
.
• To lock the SHIFT key, press SHIFT twice. To unlock, press SHIFT once again.
• To lock the ALT key, press ALT twice. To unlock, press ALT once again.
The Text Cursor
While you’re typing, the text cursor shape reflects your current “mode” of typing:
Regular typing mode
Shift key is held down
Shift key is locked down
Alt key is held down
Alt key is locked down
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
26
About Your SIM Card
3. About Your SIM Card
If you are unfamiliar with Smart Cards or SIM cards, you might be interested to learn more by reading the
following questions and answers:
• What Is a SIM Card? on page 27
• Exactly What Information Is on My Device SIM?
on page 27
• My SIM Card Came Locked! How Do I Unlock It?
on page 28
• Can I Remove My SIM? on page 28
• How Do I Handle My SIM? on page 29
• What Happens If I Lose My SIM? on
page 29
• What Happens If I Put A Different SIM
in My Device? on page 29
What Is a SIM Card?
A SIM (Subscriber Identification Module) card is distributed to you by your wireless carrier and comes packaged
in a plastic holder about the size of a credit card. After you carefully snap the SIM card from its plastic holder,
your SIM is ready to fit into a slot within your device. The SIM card contains a chip that holds information
required to operate a device. For more information about inserting your SIM card, read How to Insert Your SIM
on page 28.
Exactly What Information Is on My Device SIM?
Your device SIM stores the following information:
• International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) Number - Number that uniquely identifies you as a
subscriber on the network. The number is made up of three parts: a three-digit mobile country code, a
two-digit mobile network code, and a (up to) 10-digit mobile subscriber identify number.
• Mobile Subscriber ISDN (MSISDN) Number - Your mobile telephone number. (ISDN stands for
Integrated Services Digital Network.)
• SIM PIN - A Personal Identification Number (PIN) that you set using the Jump Settings > Key Guard &
Security screen. This code protects your SIM from being used by another person in another device in the
event it is lost or stolen.
• SMS Messages - Short Message Service messages that you receive and save. T-Mobile Phone Messages
messages use the Short Message Service. Note that outgoing messages (“sent”) are not saved to the SIM.
• Contact Information - Contact information (name:number) is only stored on your SIM if you’ve used
your SIM previously in a mobile phone and stored names and numbers in that phone.
Note that you can import previously-stored contact info into your device Address Book by following the
instructions in Import Contacts from SIM on page 126.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
27
About Your SIM Card
My SIM Card Came Locked! How Do I Unlock It?
When you receive your device, the SIM card may be locked by default. If this is the case, before you can connect
to the network or register your new device account, you’ll be prompted to enter a PIN. Type 1234. You can
always change your SIM PIN using the Key Guard & Security screen. Read more in Lock Your SIM Card on page
42.
Can I Remove My SIM?
Yes, you can; but we recommend you never remove the SIM from your device. Without a SIM card, you cannot
place phone calls to 611 (T-Mobile Customer Care), but you can call 911 (Emergency). You can only view data
that has been cached in the device memory.
If you find you must remove your SIM, please follow the directions that follow.
How to Remove Your SIM
1
To avoid seeing error messages, turn off your device by pressing the power on/off key. (It is not necessary
for your to turn your device off, however.)
2
Your SIM card fits into a slot on the left side of your device behind the end cap. Remove the end cap using
the finger notch:
3
You will see the SIM card in its slot; press the end of the SIM in toward the device and release. The SIM
should spring gently out of its slot.
4
Remove the SIM carefully. Be sure to read How Do I Handle My SIM? on page 29.
5
Replace the end cap by pressing the prongs in slightly and inserting the cap. Make sure the cap is flush with
the case.
How to Insert Your SIM
1
Remove the end cap covering the SIM slot using the finger notch.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
28
About Your SIM Card
2
Press the SIM card into its slot with the gold contacts facing down and the cut corner going in first, beneath
the Menu button.
When you release the SIM make sure it is locked into position and it doesn’t spring out.
3
Replace the end cap by pressing the prongs in slightly and inserting the cap. Make sure the cap is flush with
the case.
How Do I Handle My SIM?
Handle your SIM card very carefully since the card and gold contacts can be easily damaged by scratches or
bends. Be sure to keep SIM cards out of reach of small children.
What Happens If I Lose My SIM?
Call T-Mobile Customer Care at 1-800-937-8997.
What Happens If I Put A Different SIM in My Device?
We do not recommend you insert a different SIM into your device. If you do, your device will function
but you will not have access to your messages and you will not be able to use the telephone application. Note
that if you are going to import contact information from another SIM, follow the instructions provided in Import
Contacts from SIM on page 126.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
29
Customizing Your Device
4. Customizing Your Device
Your T-Mobile device is designed so you can set up many of its features to suit your preferences. Learn how in
this chapter:
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Settings Screens on page 30
Controls on page 33
AutoText on page 34
Battery & Display on page 35
Date & Time on page 37
Jump Shortcuts on page 38
•
•
•
•
•
•
Key Guard & Security on page 39
Keyboard on page 43
Network on page 44
Sound on page 45
System Info on page 46
Wireless Options on page 47
The Settings Screens
All customization options are on the settings screens. There’s two types of settings screens:
• Customize device settings using the Jump Settings screens: From the Jump screen, open the menu
and select Settings to open these screens.
• Customize application-specific settings using the application Settings screens: From the Jump
screen, select any application (Web Browser, AOL Instant Messenger, Email, etc.). Then open the menu
and select Settings to open these screens.
We recommend you step through the device Settings screens and then the application-specific Settings screens
to completely customize your device for your personal use. Use the tables below to guide you through the
screens. For more details on each screen, follow the links in the first column.
Device Settings
Device Settings Screen
Customizable Items and Options
Controls on page 33
• Mute/Un-mute button
• Volume slider bar
• Display slider bar
AutoText on page 34
• Capitalize new sentences check box
• Automatic Word Replacement check box and list of replacement rules you
can add to or delete from
Battery & Display on page
• Battery charge indicator
• Power-saving mode check box and idle time pop-up menu
• Automatic backlight check box and pop-up menu listing times you can
choose to keep backlight on
35
Date & Time on page 37
April 15, 2003
• Current date & time text fields
• Time Zone setting pop-up menu
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
30
Customizing Your Device
Device Settings Screen
Customizable Items and Options
Jump Shortcuts on page 38
• User-definable list of keyboard shortcuts to application screens. Jump
shortcuts use the Jump button plus another key.
Key Guard & Security on
• Automatic key guard setting and display message
• Set your three-digit security code
• Identification Tag display (Default message: “If found or if privacy code
fails, call T-Mobile Customer Care at 1-800-937-8997.”)
• Set your SIM PIN to lock your SIM card (Default PIN: 1234)
page 39
Keyboard on page 43
• Keyboard repeat delay slider bar
• Keyboard repeat rate slider bar
Network on page 44
• Scan for other networks
Sound on page 45
•
•
•
•
•
System Info on page 46
In System Info you will find the following information about your account and
device:
• Username
• Phone number
• SIM ID
• Device ID
• Recovery ROM (version)
• OS (operating system)
• Versions of firmware and applications
Wireless Options on page
Select wireless options:
• Wireless connection on/off
• GPRS Data Roaming On check box
47
April 15, 2003
Device sound & music volume slider bar
Mute/Un-mute button
System Sounds check box and volume slider bar
Keyboard Clicks check box
Mute Options
- Flash Wheel
- Vibrate Device
• Mute Schedule
- Mute every day from.... time pop-up menus
- Mute all day check box and options: Weekdays, Weekends
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
31
Customizing Your Device
Application-Specific Settings
Application Settings
Screen
Web Browser Settings on
page 57
Instant Messaging on page
87
Customizable Items and Options
• Home page URL text box and Use Current Page button
• Custom search engine in Go To dialog box selection list. Select from:
Google, Yahoo, MSN, AltaVista, Excite.
• Show Pictures check box
• Clear History, Clear Cache, Clear Cookies buttons
• Show Accept Message check box
• Play Buddy Alert Rings check boxes
- Ring when buddies sign on pop-up menu
- Ring when buddies sign off pop-up menu
- Ring when new message arrives pop-up menu
• Block User(s) List
Email Settings on page 104
•
•
•
•
Phone Settings on page 70
•
•
•
•
•
•
Setting Phone Messages
Ringtones on page 115
• Ring for Receipt of New Message check box
• Ringtone pop-up menus
Address Book Settings on
• Categories set-up screen. Use to create New Category, Edit Category, or
Discard Category.
• Labels set-up screen. Use to create New Label, Edit Label, or Discard Label.
• Import Contacts from SIM button
page 123
April 15, 2003
Show message count/size in Email screen check box
Ring for receipt of new email check box
Ringtone pop-up menus
Automatic Message Management
- Save outgoing messages in Sent folder check box
- Empty Trash every night check box
- Auto-discard msgs when mailbox is full check box
- Only discard messages older than 7 days check box
• Attachment Limits
- Remove attachments larger than... pop-up menu
- Remove attachments of these types... check boxes
Your device phone number
Accumulated Call Time and Reset button
Call volume slider bar
Call Forwarding & Voice Mail set-up screen
Ringtones set-up screen
Speed Dial set-up screen
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
32
Customizing Your Device
Controls
The Controls contains device settings that you may want to open at any time, from any screen:
Note for grayscale devices: The lower slider controls contrast rather than brightness.
Open the Sound and Display Controls
There are two ways you can open the Controls:
• Method 1: Press the Menu and Back buttons together. The Controls open. You can use this method from
any screen, in any application, at any time.
• Method 2: Press Jump
Select Controls.
to open the Jump screen. Press Menu
to open the Jump screen menu.
The Controls Settings
From the Controls you can do the following:
• Mute button - Quickly switch to quiet mode by pressing this button. Press again to “un-mute”.
• Volume slider - Adjust the volume of sound effects for new message notifications and games. After
highlighting and pressing the slider, rotate the wheel up to increase volume; rotate down to decrease
volume.
• Contrast/Brightness slider - Adjust your display image contrast to complement your current lighting
environment. Rotate the wheel to highlight the slider, then press to make the slider “editable”.
For grayscale devices: Rotate the wheel up to increase contrast, rotate down to decrease contrast.
For color devices: Rotate the wheel up to increase brightness, rotate down to decrease brightness.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
33
Customizing Your Device
AutoText
To help you type accurately, the AutoText screen includes rules that automatically correct common typing errors.
You can add to or discard rules that are included by default. To open the AutoText screen, do the following:
1
From the Jump screen, press Menu
2
On the Settings menu, rotate the wheel to highlight AutoText, then press the wheel to open the AutoText
screen:
then select Settings.
3
If you want the first letter in new sentences to be capitalized automatically, rotate the wheel to highlight the
Capitalize first letter of sentences check box, then press the wheel to select it (a check will appear in the
box).
4
If you want the replacement rules listed on the screen to be in effect, use the wheel to highlight then select
the Automatic Word Replacement check box.
5
To discard any of the replacement rules, rotate the wheel to highlight the rule, press Menu
then select
Discard [ ]. You are prompted to confirm that you really want to remove the rule. Select either Cancel or
Discard.
6
To add a new replacement rule, press Menu
opens:
then select New Rule. The New Replacement Rule dialog box
Type the word or phrase that you commonly misspell in the first text box, then type the correct spelling in the
second box. For example:
Select Done [ ] to save the replacement rule, or Cancel if you don’t want to save it after all.
7
To return all AutoText settings to those set when you first received your device, press Menu
Restore Defaults.
April 15, 2003
then select
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
34
Customizing Your Device
Battery & Display
You can see how charged your battery is by checking the Battery & Display screen. You’ll also be able to set how
long backlighting stays on after you press one of the control buttons or keyboard keys. You can also set
backlighting to never automatically turn on.
1
From the Jump screen, press Menu
2
On the Settings menu, scroll to highlight Battery & Backlight, then press the wheel to open the Battery &
Backlight screen. Note that this screen will differ, depending on whether you’re using a grayscale or color
device:
then select Settings.
Grayscale Battery & Display screen:
Color Battery & Display screen:
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
35
Customizing Your Device
3
In the first section, Battery, you can observe the percentage of charge remaining in your battery (this
number is approximate). If your battery is connected to the charger, however, you’ll see a lightning bolt on
top of the battery icon instead of the charge-remaining percentage.
For grayscale devices, in the Battery section you can enable Power-Saving Mode (screen will “blank”) by
checking the box and setting an idle time. (For color devices, power-saving mode is not available.) Select
from the following idle times:
•
•
•
•
•
5 minutes
10 minutes
30 minutes
1 hour
3 hours
Note! You must first set a Key Guard time in order for power-saving mode to work!
If your device goes into power-saving mode (the screen blanks), the wheel will glow a color, indicating the
amount of charge left in the battery:
• Green glow = 100 - 50% charge
• Yellow glow = 50% charge
• Orange/red glow = 25 - 0% charge! Connect your charger immediately!
4
In the second section, Backlight, you can set your backlighting options:
• If you want backlighting to turn on automatically after you press a control button or key, or open the
display, then select the Automatically turn on when in use check box.
• For color devices, you can choose to have the built-in light meter automatically turn the backlight on when
required by light conditions. To choose this option, select the Automatically turn on only when needed
check box.
• If you never want backlighting to turn on automatically, then make sure you haven’t select any automatic
backlight check box.
Note: You can always manually turn on backlighting by pressing Menu
+ Back , which opens the
Controls.
5
When backlighting turns on (either automatically or if you turn it on manually), the backlight will stay on for
the amount selected in the Turn on after pop-up menu. To open the pop-up menu, rotate the wheel to
highlight the menu, then press the wheel to open it. You can select from:
• 15 seconds
• 30 seconds
• 1 minute
• 2 minutes
• 5 minutes
Scroll to highlight the time you want, then press the wheel to select it.
Tip: As long as you press a key or button before the set time elapses, the backlight will stay on.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
36
Customizing Your Device
Date & Time
The T-Mobile service knows the Coordinated Universal Time, or UTC. (Note that UTC is also known as Greenwich
Mean Time, or GMT.) UTC reflects the mean solar time along the Earth's prime meridian. The prime meridian is
arbitrarily based on the meridian that runs through the Greenwich Observatory outside of London, where the
present system originated.
To set your device time correctly, you must select your time zone. Note that you cannot change the Date and
Time field settings unless you are disconnected from the network (read more in Override System Date & Time
Settings on page 38).
1
From the Jump screen, press Menu
2
On the Settings menu, scroll to highlight Date & Time, then press the wheel to open the Date & Time screen:
then select Settings.
3
To open the Time Zone pop-up menu, rotate the wheel to highlight the menu, then press the wheel to open
it. Use the wheel to highlight the time zone you want your device to reflect, then press the wheel.
4
If your time zone is not shown, select GMT Offset... from the pop-up menu. The GMT Offset dialog box
opens:
• Use the wheel to highlight the Offset pop-up menu, then press to open the menu.
• Rotate the wheel up (away from you) to select a higher offset than the default; rotate the wheel down
(toward you) to decrease the offset amount.
• Press the wheel to select the offset.
• Select Done [ ].
5
Press Back
April 15, 2003
to save your settings.
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
37
Customizing Your Device
Override System Date & Time Settings
If you are not connected to the network, you can override the system-set date and time settings by doing the
following:
1
On the Date & Time Settings screen, highlight either the date or time box then press the wheel to activate
the pop-up selector. The first selectable field expands into a pop-up:
2
Rotate the wheel until you see the correct value.
3
To select the value, press the wheel. The pop-up selector collapses.
4
Rotate the wheel to move to the next selectable field, then press to open the pop-up selector:
5
Proceed until all fields are set as you wish.
6
Press Back
to save your settings.
Jump Shortcuts
You can always press Jump
to return to the Jump screen, where you can then select one of the applications.
However, if you want to jump to a specific application quickly, you can set a shortcut key. Your device comes with
a default set of shortcut keys, but you can change them, as described below.
Change Default Shortcuts
1
From the Jump screen, press Menu
2
On the Settings menu, scroll to highlight Jump Shortcuts, then press the wheel to open the Jump Shortcuts
screen:
April 15, 2003
then select Settings.
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
38
Customizing Your Device
3
Scroll to highlight the application for which you want to change a Jump shortcut, then press the wheel. The
Key Mapping dialog box appears. In the illustration below, Address Book was highlighted when the Key
Assignment dialog box opened:
4
Press the key you want to use to jump to the application you’ve highlighted. The Key Mapping dialog box
disappears and your shortcut is saved.
5
Now, to use a Jump Shortcut from any screen at any time, press Jump
application.
6
To delete a shortcut key mapping, scroll the wheel to highlight the application name, then press the Delete
key.
plus the shortcut key to open that
Key Guard & Security
The device’s Key Guard and Security screen allows you to do the following:
• Set Up Key Guard
• Turn On/Off Privacy Lock
• Lock Your SIM Card
Set Up Key Guard
Key guard is a feature that allows you to protect the device’s control buttons from being pressed accidentally
while your device is in your pocket or bag. While in key guard mode, your device is also in a power-saving mode,
so you save battery power.
Turn on Key Guard Manually
You can turn on key guard manually in two ways:
• Press and hold Back
• Press Jump
for three seconds.
to return to the Jump screen, then press Menu
and select Key Guard.
Turn on Key Guard Automatically
You can set key guard to turn on automatically by doing the following:
1
From the Jump screen, press Menu
April 15, 2003
then select Settings.
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
39
Customizing Your Device
2
On the Settings menu, scroll to highlight Key Guard & Security, then press the wheel to open the Key Guard
& Security screen:
3
In the Key Guard section, rotate the wheel to highlight the pop-up menu, as shown above.
4
If you want to change the default setting, press the wheel to open the pop-up menu and reveal all the timeidle choices:
• Guard after 2 minutes
• Guard after 5 minutes
• Guard after 15 minutes
• Never automatically guard (Note: This option is only available on grayscale devices.)
5
Rotate the wheel to select the option you want, then press the wheel to select it.
Note for color devices: To prevent device damage, after your device has been in key guard mode for 2 hours,
a screen saver will appear. The screen saver is a small image that moves To dismiss the screen saver, press any
key or open the device.
Unlock Your Device
To unlock your device (take it out of key guard mode), simply press Menu
+ Back
.
Set a Key Guard Display Message
You can display a one-line personal message that displays on the screen while the device is in key guard mode:
1
From the Key Guard & Security screen, scroll to highlight the Key Guard Display Message text box.
2
Type your message. Your message must fit on one line, which is approximately 20-30 characters.
3
Your settings are saved as soon as you make them.
4
To remove your message, simply delete the text from the Key Guard Display Message box by pressing
ALT +
.
About Privacy Lock and Key Guard
If you have set a privacy lock (as described below), then you will be prompted to enter your 3-digit code before
your device will unlock from key guard mode.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
40
Customizing Your Device
Turn On/Off Privacy Lock
If you want to secure your device from unauthorized access once your device has gone into key guard mode,
you will first need to set up a privacy code by following the instructions below.
1
From the Jump screen, press Menu
2
On the Settings menu, scroll to highlight Key Guard & Security, then press the wheel to open the Key Guard
& Security screen.
then select Settings.
3
Scroll down to the Privacy Lock section:
4
Using the wheel, press the Turn On Privacy... button:
The combination dialog box opens.
5
Enter a three-digit code using the keyboard or the dial. After you do so, a Verify Your Combination dialog box
will appear.
6
Re-enter the three digits to verify.
7
A “security enabled” message appears. Select OK.
8
After reading the confirmation message, select OK.
9
You are returned to the Key Guard & Security screen with the Turn Off Privacy... button highlighted.
10 If you want to turn off Privacy Lock at any time, simply highlight then press this button.
11 At the prompt, enter your three-digit code using the keyboard or dial.
12 You are returned to the Key Guard & Security screen, where you can Turn On Privacy at any time.
Note: If you accidentally lock yourself out of your device, you can still make an emergency phone call by
pressing Menu
+ Jump .
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
41
Customizing Your Device
Fill in Your Identification Tag
Use your device’s Identification Tag as a device identifier if someone types an incorrect privacy code when
attempting to unlock your device from key guard. This can be important if you lose your device and another
person tries to use it. Your device comes with the ID Tag filled in with information about contacting Customer
Care, but you can change this default message by doing the following:
1
From Key Guard & Security screen, scroll to the Identification Tag section.
2
Use the wheel to highlight the Identification Tag text box. Delete the default text in the box by pressing
ALT + SHIFT +
.
3
Type identifying information about yourself, such as:
Note that you can only type four lines in your Identification Tag.
4
If, for some reason, you do not want to display your Identification Tag, delete the text in the Identification
Tag box by pressing ALT + SHIFT +
.
5
Press Back
to save your settings.
Lock Your SIM Card
By locking your SIM card, you ensure that no one except yourself (assuming you are the only person who knows
the SIM PIN) can use your device while your SIM card is in place. Note that your SIM may be installed with a
default PIN (1234).
To lock your SIM, do the following:
1
From the Jump screen, press Menu
2
On the Settings menu, scroll to highlight Key Guard & Security, then press the wheel to open the Key Guard
& Security screen.
3
Scroll to the SIM Card Lock section:
4
Highlight and press the Enable SIM Lock... button. The Enable SIM Lock dialog box appears:
5
Type your PIN and select Enable [ ]. You’ll receive a confirmation dialog box that your SIM card is now
locked. Now, you will be prompted to type your SIM PIN whenever you unlock key guard.
April 15, 2003
then select Settings.
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
42
Customizing Your Device
Unlock Your SIM Card
1
To unlock your SIM card, from the Key Guard & Security screen, press the Disable SIM Lock... button:
The Unlock SIM dialog box appears.
2
Type your PIN, then select OK. Your SIM card is unlocked.
Change Your SIM PIN
If you have SIM Lock enabled, then you can change your SIM PIN. (Remember that the default SIM PIN is
1234.)
1
From the Key Guard & Security screen, scroll to the SIM Card Lock section:
2
Select the Change SIM PIN... button, as shown above. The Change SIM PIN dialog box opens:
3
In the text boxes, type your old PIN, the new PIN (4-8 digits), and then your new PIN again to confirm.
4
Select Submit
to dismiss the dialog box and save your new PIN. You will receive a confirmation dialog box
to let you know your PIN was changed successfully.
Keyboard
You can set how the keyboard responds to your touch:
• Keyboard repeat delay - If you hold down a key long enough, it will start repeating in your text box. This
setting determines how long you must hold down a key before it starts repeating.
• Keyboard repeat rate - Once you’ve held down a key long enough so it starts repeating, this setting
determines how fast the key repeats.
To set these preferences, do the following:
1
From the Jump screen, press Menu
April 15, 2003
then select Settings.
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
43
Customizing Your Device
2
On the Settings menu, scroll to highlight Keyboard, then press the wheel to open the Keyboard screen:
3
You set your keyboard preferences by using “slider bars”. Rotate the wheel to highlight the slider you want
adjust, then press the wheel to “open” the slider bar. An opened slider bar looks like this:
4
Rotate the wheel up to increase the setting; rotate the wheel down to decrease the setting. This means
that to:
• Increase the time you have to hold down a key before it starts to repeat, move the slider to the right.
• Increase how fast keys are repeated, once they start repeating, move the slider to the right.
5
When the slider is where you want it to be, press the wheel. The settings are saved as soon as you make
them.
Network
If you wish to change the network to which your device is connected, you can do this from the Networks screen.
(You can always tell what network you’re currently on by pressing Jump . The current network is shown at the
bottom of the Phone splash screen.)
You have two methods of selecting a network: automatic and manual. By default, your device is set to select
a network automatically, but you can use the Network screen to select one manually:
1
From the Jump screen, press Menu
2
On the Settings menu, scroll to highlight Network, then press the wheel to open the Network screen:
3
The Scan for other networks button is highlighted by default. Simply press the wheel to start the scan.
April 15, 2003
then select Settings.
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
44
Customizing Your Device
4
When the available network(s) have been located, you’ll see the Choose Network screen. Press the wheel to
open the pop-up menu:
Scroll to highlight the network you want to switch to, then press the wheel to select it.
Note: It is also from this screen that you set your device to scan for networks automatically.
5
Once your device has connected to the network you selected, the Network screen will reflect your selection:
Sound
You control your device’s sound on the Sound settings screen. You can set sound volume, as well as “mute”
options. In some situations, you may want you device to be “quiet” when notifying you of new messages or
phone calls. This is called “mute”. You can also schedule regular times when you want your device to be muted.
To make these settings, do the following:
1
From the Jump screen, press Menu
2
On the Settings menu, scroll to highlight Sound, then press the wheel to open the Sound screen:
April 15, 2003
then select Settings.
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
45
Customizing Your Device
3
In the Sound & Music section of the screen, you can do the following:
• Adjust sound & music volume level - Rotate the wheel to highlight the Volume slider bar, then press.
The slider bar becomes “adjustable”. Rotate the wheel up to increase volume; rotate the wheel down to
decrease. When you have a volume you want to keep, then press the wheel to save the setting.
• Mute/un-mute all device sounds - Press the Mute/Un-mute button to toggle sounds on and off.
• Turn on/off system sounds - Select the check box to turn system sounds on/off. System sounds are
those that are made when you press a control button or key. They are typically beeps or exclamation
sounds.
• Turn on/off keyboard clicks - If you’ve selected the System Sounds check box, then you can also
turn on keyboard clicks. If you select this check box, then everytime you press a key, you’ll hear a little
beep.
4
In the Mute Options section of the screen, you can do the following:
• Decide if you want to be notified by a flashing wheel or vibration even if your device is muted, select the
appropriate check boxes.
• To have your device mute automatically at a regular time, select the Mute every day from check box.
When checked, mute is scheduled. If you want to adjust the default scheduled time, use the wheel: rotate
to select the time box, then press to enable scrolling through time settings and the AM/PM setting. Press
the wheel again when the time you want displays.
• You can also schedule mute to turn on automatically on weekdays or weekends (all day). Select the Mute
all day check box to enable this feature; then select either the Weekdays or Weekends option button.
5
Your settings are saved as soon as you make them.
System Info
Use the System Info screen to look up information you may need when contacting Customer Care. You can also
look up your phone number from this screen, in case you ever forget it.
To open this screen, do the following:
1
From the Jump screen, press Menu
2
On the Settings menu, scroll to highlight System Info, then press the wheel to open the System Info screen:
3
To dismiss the System Info screen, press Back
April 15, 2003
then select Settings.
.
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
46
Customizing Your Device
Wireless Options
If you want control over your wireless connectivity, you can do so from the Wireless Options dialog:
1
From the Jump screen, press Menu
2
Scroll to the bottom of the Settings screen and select the Wireless Options... button. The Wireless Options
dialog box opens:
then select Settings.
3
In the Wireless section of the dialog box, use the option buttons to turn your wireless connection on/off.
This is how you turn off your wireless connection while on a plane or in a hospital, or anywhere where
wireless connectivity may interfere with the environment.
4
In the Roaming section of the dialog box, check the box to allow GPRS data roaming; clear the check box to
disallow data roaming. Be aware that even if you have roaming turned on (box is checked), your wireless
carrier may have disabled roaming for the SIMs they distribute.
Note! When roaming outside the home network, you may incur additional charges for data transfer with or
without taking any actions, such as receiving emails. To avoid additional charges while roaming, clear the
Roaming check box. If you do roam with GPRS Data Roaming turned off, you will still be able to make and
receive voice calls.
5
Once you’ve made your wireless option choices, select Done
April 15, 2003
.
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
47
The Jump Screen
5. The Jump Screen
In this chapter you can read all about your device’s “home base” -- the Jump screen:
• About the Jump Screen on page 48
• How to Find the Jump Screen on page 49
• The Application Splash Screens on page 49
• How to Select an Application on page 49
• The Jump Screen Menu on page 50
About the Jump Screen
The Jump screen is a view that displays all the applications you can use on your device in a ring of application
icons (on the left) and “splash screens” (on the right). You use the Jump screen by scrolling through the
applications by rotatating the wheel...until the application you want to open displays. Then press the wheel to
open the application.
The Jump screen is illustrated below, with the Phone application displayed:
Read more about splash screens in The Application Splash Screens on page 49.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
48
The Jump Screen
How to Find the Jump Screen
Simply press the Jump button
to view the Jump screen. You can “jump” to this view from any screen, in any
application, at any time, by pressing the Jump button. The Phone application is highlighted by default.
The Application Splash Screens
As you view the Jump screen and scroll through each application using the wheel, the splash screen applicable to
that application highlighted displays to the right of the Jump screen wheel.
Some splash screens contain application status information. For example, in the illustration of the Jump screen
above, the Phone splash screen shows the device owner that her total phone call time is 43 seconds.
Jump splash screens that contain timely user information are described in more detail in the following topics:
• Phone Splash Screen on page 59
• Instant Messaging Splash Screen on page 74
• The Email Splash Screen on page 87
• Phone Messages Splash Screen on page 108
How to Select an Application
1
Press Jump
2
Scroll through the applications using the wheel. Stop when the application you want to use is highlighted.
3
Press the wheel to open the application.
April 15, 2003
to open the Jump screen.
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
49
The Jump Screen
The Jump Screen Menu
While on the Jump screen, press Menu
to open the Jump screen menu:
Here’s what each menu option means:
• Controls... [
+
] - Opens the Controls. Read more in Controls on page 33.
• Settings - Opens the Settings screen, from which you can make device-wide settings. Read more in 4.
Customizing Your Device on page 30.
• Key Guard [Hold
] - Puts your device into key guard mode, which locks the keys.
• Hints... - Opens a series of help screens.
• Network Status - Lists current network status details:
• Power Off [
April 15, 2003
] - Turns off your device. You’ll see a series of shut-down messages as the device turns off.
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
50
Browsing the Internet
6. Browsing the Internet
Get away from it all and still browse the Internet! You’ll love the Web Browser application on your T-Mobile
device. To learn how to take advantage of all your Web Browser features, read the topics in this chapter:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Browser Splash Screen on page 51
Status Indicators on page 51
Keyboard Shortcuts on page 52
Navigation/View Shortcuts on page 52
Go To a Web Page on page 53
Go to Your Home Page on page 53
Search the Web on page 53
• Use Bookmarks on page 54
• See Recently-Viewed Web Pages on
page 55
• View History on page 56
• Refresh a Web Page on page 56
• Stop a Web Page from Loading on page
56
• Web Browser Settings on page 57
Browser Splash Screen
To open the Web Browser application, first press Jump, then scroll to highlight the Web Browser icon in the lefthand “ring” of applications. You will see the Web Browser “splash” screen on the right side of the screen when
you’ve highlighted the Web Browser application icon:
Status Indicators
When a Web page is being loaded, you will see (at the bottom of your screen), the following status indicators:
The remote server is being contacted for the page you
requested.
The page you requested is being downloaded from the
remote server onto the service.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
51
Browsing the Internet
The page you requested is being displayed to the device.
You may not see this indicator if the Web page displays
quickly.
If a Web page is longer than your display, you will see a vertical scroll bar along the right of your screen. Use the
wheel to scroll down the page, or use the shortcuts described in Navigation/View Shortcuts below.
Keyboard Shortcuts
While you’re in the Web Browser, you can use the following shortcuts for Menu items:
Bookmarks
+K
Add Bookmark...
+N
Go To
+O
Home
+H
Recent Pages...
+L
Mail URL
+M
Refresh
+R
Stop Loading
+.
Navigation/View Shortcuts
You can use the following shortcuts to navigate or change your view when using the Web Browser:
• Scroll down a page:
- Press down arrow on D-pad, or
- Rotate wheel toward you, or
- Hold down
while rotating wheel (to scroll down screen-by-screen)
• Scroll up a page:
- Press up key on D-pad, or
- Rotate wheel away from you, or
- Hold down
while rotating wheel away from you (to scroll up screen-by-screen)
• Toggle to full screen (hide title bar)
- Press
+ SHIFT + T
• Go Back to last-viewed Web page
- Press the Back button
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
52
Browsing the Internet
Go To a Web Page
To open any Web page, do the following while you’re in the Web Browser application:
1
Start typing the address (URL) of the Web page you want to visit. The Go To dialog box opens automatically,
showing the address you are typing. Note! You do not need to type the “www.” or “.com” portion of the Web
address. You can also open the Go To dialog box from the Web Browser menu.
2
Possible matches, based on what you’ve typed in this Go To dialog box previously, plus the Search and Edit
options appear below the possible matches:
3
Use the wheel to select a choice:
• If you highlight a matching URL then press the wheel, you will be taken directly to the URL selected.
However, if you want to paste the URL in the Go To dialog box then edit it, hold the Shift key down while
you press the wheel. The URL is pasted in the Go To dialog box and you can edit the Web address there.
• If you highlight the Search for entry then press the wheel, a search for that entry will conducted by the
search engine you’ve specified in Set Your Search Engine on page 57.
• The Edit option only appears if the current page’s URL contains a match for your Go To entry. If you
highlight and select the Edit entry, the current page’s URL will appear in the Go To dialog box, ready for
you to edit.
Note! If you find a Web address (URL) that cannot be displayed on your device, please send us an email at
[email protected] and we will investigate. In the email, include the Web address and the problem you
experienced when trying to go to the URL, including any error messages you received.
Go to Your Home Page
Your home page is set in the Web Browser Settings screen as described in Set Your Home Page on page 57. You
can go to your home page in either of two ways while in the Web Browser:
• Press Menu
then select Home.
• Use the keyboard shortcut by pressing
+ H.
Search the Web
To search the Web for keywords, do the following while you’re in the Web Browser application:
1
Start typing the word(s) you want to include in the search. The Go To dialog box opens automatically,
showing the word(s) you are typing.
2
The Search option appears directly below the word(s) you are typing:
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
53
Browsing the Internet
When you are finished typing your search words, use the wheel to scroll down to highlight the Search option
(as shown below), then press.
3
Your Web search is then conducted by the search engine you have specified in Set Your Search Engine on
page 57. Your search results display on the search engine’s Web page. Use the wheel to scroll to the result
you want to follow and press.
Use Bookmarks
A bookmark is a saved link to a Web page that has been added to a list of saved links. When you are looking at
a particular Web page and want the ability to get back to it later quickly, create a bookmark for it. (Read how in
Add Bookmarks on page 54.)
View Bookmarks
While in the Web Browser, you can see the bookmarks you have already set by doing either of the following:
• Press Menu
then select Bookmarks.
• Use the keyboard shortcut by pressing
+ K.
The Bookmarks screen looks like the following:
Notice, you can create folders to organize your bookmarks. “Expand” or “collapse” the bookmarks contained
within a given folder by highlighting the folder and pressing the wheel. Press to expand, press again to collapse
the list.
Read more about folders in Add/Edit/Delete Bookmark Folders on page 55.
Add Bookmarks
To add a bookmark to your list of bookmarks, do the following while in the Web Browser:
1
Open the Web page you want to bookmark.
2
Press Menu
April 15, 2003
then select Add Bookmark... [
+ N].
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
54
Browsing the Internet
3
The Add Bookmark screen opens with the Name and URL fields filled in:
Scroll to highlight the Folder pop-up menu, then press the wheel to open the list of options. Scroll to
highlight the folder in which you want the bookmark to appear, then press the wheel to select it.
4
When finished, press Done
. Your bookmark is added.
Edit and Discard Bookmarks
You can change the address (URL), name, or folder of an existing bookmark, or discard a bookmark by doing the
following while in the Web Browser:
1
From the Web Browser, press Menu
2
Scroll to highlight the bookmark you wish to modify.
then select Bookmarks [
3
Press Menu
+ K]. The Bookmarks screen opens.
to open the Bookmarks menu, and then:
• To edit a bookmark name, select Edit Bookmark to open the Edit Bookmark dialog box. Change the
bookmark name, URL, or folder as you wish; then press Done .
• To discard a bookmark, select Discard Bookmark. You will be asked to confirm your action before the
bookmark is actually removed.
Add/Edit/Delete Bookmark Folders
You can organize your bookmarks into folders that you name. To add, edit, or delete a bookmark folder, do the
following while in the Web Browser:
1
From the Web Browser screen, press Menu
opens.
then select Bookmarks [
+ K]. The Bookmarks screen
2
Scroll to highlight the folder you wish to modify. If you are adding a folder, don’t worry about what folder is
highlighted.
3
Press Menu
to open the Bookmarks menu, and then:
• To edit a folder name, select Rename... to open the Rename dialog box. Change the folder name as you
wish and press Done .
• To discard a folder, select Discard. You will be asked to confirm your action before the folder is
discarded.
• To add a folder, select New Folder... The New Folder dialog box appears. Type the new folder name and
press Done .
See Recently-Viewed Web Pages
To see a list of Web pages that you have visited recently, relative to the page you are currently viewing, use the
Recent Pages screen while in the Web Browser application:
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
55
Browsing the Internet
1
From the Web Browser screen, press Menu
then select Recent Pages... [ + L]. The Recent Pages
dialog box opens. Notice that the page you are currently viewing is marked with a diamond and its listing is
positioned relative to where you’ve been:
2
Scroll to highlight a page you wish to return to, then press the wheel to go there.
By using Recent Pages, you can easily navigate forward and backward among pages you’ve visited.
You can clear your Recent Pages list from the Settings screen. Read more in Clear History on page 58.
View History
To see a chronological list of Web pages you have visited (up to 100), open the History screen while in the Web
Browser application:
1
From the Web Browser screen, press Menu
then select History. The History screen opens:
2
To return to any of the pages listed, simply scroll to highlight the URL, the press the wheel to select it.
You can clear your history from the Settings screen. Read more in Clear History on page 58.
Refresh a Web Page
You can refresh (reload from the originating server) the Web page you are currently viewing in either of two
ways:
• Press Menu
then select Refresh.
• Use the keyboard shortcut by pressing
+ R.
Stop a Web Page from Loading
You can stop a Web page from loading in either of two ways:
• Press Menu
then select Stop Loading.
• Use the keyboard shortcut by pressing
April 15, 2003
+ ..
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
56
Browsing the Internet
Web Browser Settings
You can customize a number of settings from the Web Browser Settings screen:
Specifically, you can:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Set Your Home Page
Set Your Search Engine
Show Pictures
Clear History
Clear Cache
Clear Cookies
The sections below explain what each setting means.
Set Your Home Page
To set your Web home page (the page you want the browser to open by default), do the following while in the
Web Browser application:
1
From the Web Browser screen, press Menu
2
On the Settings screen, scroll to the Home Page text field and type the URL of your preferred home page.
then select Settings.
Alternatively, you could select the Use Current Page button if you want to use the Web page that was
displayed on the screen before you opened the Settings screen.
3
Press Back
to save your setting.
Set Your Search Engine
To set the search engine you want to use by default, do the following while in the Web Browser application:
1
From the Web Browser screen, press Menu
2
On the Settings screen, scroll to highlight the Search Engine pop-up menu.
3
Press the wheel to open the list of options.
4
Scroll to your preferred search engine and press the wheel to select it.
5
Press Back
April 15, 2003
then select Settings.
to save your setting.
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
57
Browsing the Internet
Show Pictures
You can decide if you want the Web Browser to display Web pictures on your device by doing the following while
in the Web Browser application:
1
From the Web Browser screen, press Menu
2
On the Settings screen, scroll to highlight the Show Pictures check box.
then select Settings.
3
To have pictures display, press the wheel to select the check box; to prevent pictures from displaying, press
the wheel to clear the check box.
Clear History
History contains a chronological list of Web pages you have visited (up to 100). To remove all Web pages from
the list, scroll to highlight the Clear History button, then press the wheel to select it. Note that when you clear
your history, you also clear your Recent Pages list.
Clear Cache
The device cache stores temporary Internet files such as Web pages and files (such as graphics). The device
allocates up to 800 KB for the cache. This speeds up the display of pages you frequently visit or have already
seen because the browser can open them from your device memory rather than the Web.
To clear your cache, scroll to highlight the Clear Cache button, then press the wheel to select it. Note that this
may take a while. You’ll be notified when the cache has been cleared.
Clear Cookies
Many Web sites save information to your system (the Web proxy service in this case) so sites can “remember”
information you’ve entered (including which pages you’ve visited within their site) for future reference. This
information is stored in a small text file, called a cookie. Know that only the information you type while visiting a
Web site can be stored. Also, know that the presence of a cookie does not allow any external Web site access to
other information on your device. A Web site can only read the cookie that it created.
If you want to delete all the cookies stored for your account on the Web proxy service database, scroll to
highlight the Clear Cookies button, then press the wheel to select it.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
58
Making Phone Calls
7. Making Phone Calls
Your Phone application has many unique features that will make it easier than ever to stay connected! Read the
topics in this chapter to learn how to take advantage of all the application has to offer:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Phone Splash Screen on page 59
Keyboard Shortcuts on page 60
Title Bar Indicators on page 60
Manage Your Speed Dial List on page 60
Headset or Handset? on page 62
Adjusting Volume on page 62
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Place a Call on page 63
Features While on a Call on page 65
Answer a Call on page 67
End a Call on page 67
Your Call Log on page 68
Listen to Voice Mail on page 70
Phone Settings on page 70
Phone Splash Screen
To open the Phone application, first press Jump, then scroll to highlight the Phone icon in the left-hand “ring” of
applications. You will see the Phone “splash” screen on the right side of the screen when you’ve highlighted the
Phone application icon:
The splash screen shows the total call time elapsed since you last reset the counter (read more in Total Call
Timer and Reset on page 71) as well as the network operator to which your device is currently connected.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
59
Making Phone Calls
Keyboard Shortcuts
While you’re in the Phone application, you can use the following shortcuts for menu items:
End Call
Press
Dial with Wheel
+W
Add/Edit Contact...
+@
Call Log
+L
Second Call...
+N
Mute/Un-mute Call
+M
Note that while you’re on a phone call:
• Press @ (at sign) to create a * (star) tone.
• Press . (period) to create a # (pound) tone.
Title Bar Indicators
Your device title bar will show you the status of your Phone application; for example:
The phone symbol shown above, plus others you might see at some time, are explained below:
You have one call active; time elapsed is 3 minutes, 40 seconds. Note that the
phone icon and the time display alternately. If you have two calls active, you’ll see
one phone icon blinking and the time displayed will be for the foreground call.
Call forwarding is turned on. Your phone will not ring.
You have unheard voice mail.
Manage Your Speed Dial List
You can store up to eight speed dial numbers for easy dialing. Note that shortcut #1 is reserved for your voice
mailbox number and cannot be reassigned.
Once you store a speed dial number, you can easily dial that number by pressing and holding the shortcut
number for at least two seconds. Very convenient! You can always check your Speed Dial list assignments by
opening the Quick Call pop-up menu on the main dialing screen.
You can add, edit, or delete speed dial numbers from the Settings > Speed Dial screen or from the New Speed
Dial menu item. Details follow.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
60
Making Phone Calls
Adding a Number to Your Speed Dial List
To add a number to your Speed Dial list, do the following while in the Phone application:
1
From the main Phone screen, press Menu
dialog box opens:
then select New Speed Dial.... The New Speed Dial Entry
2
The next-available shortcut number is selected by default in the pop-up menu. You can use this number or
any other number that isn’t already assigned.
3
Type the Name and Number of the contact. As you type the name, possible matches from your Address
Book contacts will appear in a pop-up menu for easy selection.
4
Select Create
. Your speed dial number is saved.
Editing an Existing Speed Dial Number
To edit an existing speed dial number, do the following while in the Phone application:
1
From the main Phone screen, press Menu
2
In the Settings section, scroll to highlight Speed Dial, then press the wheel. The Set Up Speed Dial screen
appears:
3
Scroll to highlight the entry you want to edit, then press the wheel. The Edit Speed Dial Entry screen
appears. Make your change to the shortcut number, name, or phone number.
4
When finished, select Done
April 15, 2003
then select Settings. The Phone Settings screen appears.
.
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
61
Making Phone Calls
Removing an Existing Speed Dial Number
To remove an existing speed dial number, do the following while in the Phone application:
1
From the main Phone screen, press Menu
2
In the Settings section, scroll to highlight Speed Dial, then press the wheel. The Set Up Speed Dial screen
appears.
3
Scroll to highlight the entry you want to remove.
4
Press Menu
5
You’ll receive a confirmation dialog box; select Discard. The speed dial entry is removed.
then select Discard [
then select Settings. The Phone Settings screen appears.
].
Headset or Handset?
When making a phone call, you can use the device as a handset or use the headset.
• Handset - Make sure the display lid is in the closed position. Hold the phone as a receiver, speaking into
the microphone located between the Menu and Jump buttons.
Tip! The listening sound is best when you hold the phone tight against your ear and the “mouthpiece”
slightly away from your face, as shown in the illustration above. The microphone is sensitive enough to
pick up your voice even if you hold it at this angle (about 20-30 degrees relative to your face).
• Headset - Plug your headset lead into your device headset/camera jack as shown above.
Adjusting Volume
While you’re on an active call, you can adjust the speaker volume:
1
Scroll to highlight the speaker volume button
2
Rotate the wheel to adjust the volume up or down: rotating up (away from you) increases volume; rotating
down (toward you) decreases volume.
April 15, 2003
, then press the wheel. The Volume control opens:
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
62
Making Phone Calls
Place a Call
There are many ways you can “dial” a call with your device. This section describes all the methods. Pick the one
that suits you:
• Keyboard Dialing on page 63
• Keypad Dialing on page 63
• Redialing a Number on page 64
• Speed Dialing on page 64
• Dialing Recent Numbers on page 64
• Dialing Using Letters on page 64
• Dialing from the Call Log on page 64
• Dialing from the Look Up Screen on page 65
• Dialing from Contact Information on page 65
Dialing Method
Instructions
Keyboard Dialing
With the device display lid open, type the number using the number
keys.
Press Send Call to place the call.
Keypad Dialing
Scroll to highlight the Dial button:
Then press the wheel to open the on-screen keypad:
Scroll to highlight a number, then press the wheel to select it. Continue
until your number is complete. If you type an incorrect number by
mistake, use the Delete key or press
to erase it.
Press Send Call to send the call.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
63
Making Phone Calls
Dialing Method
Instructions
Redialing a Number
You can redial a number you just disconnected by pressing the
button.
Speed Dialing
You can place a call using an assigned speed dial number. Press and
hold the shortcut number key for at least two seconds to send the call.
Tip: If you’ve forgotten your speed dial number assignments, open the
pop-up menu on the main dialing screen. Your Speed Dial
list is shown at the top.
Dialing Recent Numbers
The Phone application stores a list of the last 10 numbers you’ve called,
received, or missed. To open this list, scroll to highlight
,
then press the wheel to open the pop-up menu:
Scroll to highlight the number you want to call, then press the wheel to
send the call.
The symbols to the left of the name/number tell you the “category” of
the recent call:
- Incoming
- Outgoing
- Missed
In addition, at the top of the recently-called list, is a list of your stored
Speed Dial numbers.
Dialing Using Letters
If you want to dial a phone number that appears as letters (such as 1800-FLOWERS), you can use the keyboard’s alpha keys to type the
number. The Phone application will “interpret” the letters and send the
numeric equivalent.
Dialing from the Call Log
The Call Log is described in detail in Your Call Log on page 68, but (in
brief) here’s how to dial using the Call Log:
• Open the menu and select Call Log [ + L].
• Scroll to highlight the number you want to call, then press the wheel
to send the call.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
64
Making Phone Calls
Dialing Method
Instructions
Dialing from the Look Up
Screen
You can open a “Look Up” view into your Address Book that just lists
your contacts and phone numbers. To use this screen to dial a number:
• Scroll to highlight
, then press the wheel to open the
Look Up screen.
• An abbreviated Browse Contacts screen appears, showing names
and phone numbers.
• Scroll through your contacts until you find the phone number you
want to call, then press the wheel to send the call. To find a contact
quickly, start typing the name and the Match dialog box will open,
narrowing your search.
• You return to the Phone application screen.
Dialing from Contact
Information
You can call a contact stored in your Address Book directly from their
contact information:
• From the Jump screen select Address Book.
• Open the information for the contact you want to call.
• Scroll to highlight the phone number of interest.
• Open the menu and select Call.
• You return to the Phone application as the call is sent.
Features While on a Call
While you’re on a call, you can:
•
•
•
•
Enter Additional Numbers
Mute Your Call
Make a Second Call
Make a Conference Call
Enter Additional Numbers
Sometimes after connecting to a phone number, you’ll need to enter additional numbers (such as menu item
choices or your voice mailbox security code). You can enter these numbers by using either of these two
methods:
• Method 1 - Use the keyboard. Note that you can press @ (at sign) to create a * (star) tone, and press
. (period) to create a # (pound) tone.
• Method 2 - Select
to open the on-screen keypad. Scroll to highlight the number or symbol you
want, then press the wheel to select it. Repeat for each character you need to enter. Press Back
dismiss the keypad when finished.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
to
65
Making Phone Calls
Mute Your Call
During an active call you can mute your side of the conversation by opening the menu and selecting Mute Call
[ + M]. To open your side of the call to the listener again, open the menu again and select Un-mute Call
[ + M].
Make a Second Call
While on an active call, you can place a second call:
1
With your current call active, let the person you’re speaking to know you’re about to put them on hold.
2
Press Menu
3
Place your second call number using one of the dialing methods described in Place a Call on page 63.
4
Your first call still appears on your screen, in the lower panel:
5
To switch between callers, select the
then select Second Call... [
+ N]. The active call is placed on hold automatically.
button, highlighted by default in the lower panel. After you
select this button, the active caller is put on hold and their call is shown in the lower panel.
6
To end either call, select End Call
while the call is active. To end the call on hold without resuming it,
scroll to highlight the End Call button, then press the wheel.
Make a Conference Call
You can make a three-way conference call using your device. To do this, first you need to have two callers on
your phone, one active and one on hold, as described in Make a Second Call on page 66. Then:
1
Press Menu
2
You and your two callers are now conferenced into the same “line”. Your screen appears like this:
April 15, 2003
then select Conference [
+ C].
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
66
Making Phone Calls
3
You can end the conference by dropping the two calls individually by selecting the End Call buttons in turn,
or by selecting the
button.
Answer a Call
When you receive a new incoming phone call, you will see a notification screen like the following:
Since the Answer Phone button is highlighted by default, all you have to do is press the wheel to answer the
call.
To send the call directly to voice mail, highlight and select the Forward to Voice Mail button, or simply
press Back .
There are a couple of special cases you should know about:
• If your device is locked when a call comes in, press Menu
to unlock the wheel, then press the
wheel to answer the call. Once you’re on the call, the phone screen will include a button that allows you to
the device so you can use the Menu, Back, and Jump buttons.
• If you are already in a call when another call comes in (call waiting), the notification screen will
include a button to Switch Calls. If you press this button, the first call will be put on hold. Alternatively,
you can press the Forward to Voice Mail button
to send the incoming call straight to voice mail.
About Caller ID
If your caller does not have Caller ID blocked on their phone account, then the incoming call notification screen
will include the caller information. In addition, if you have the caller in your Address Book, the notification screen
will be further personalized with the label on the phone number and an identity icon, if you have stored this
information.
For example, in the case that the caller does not have Caller ID blocked and you have the caller in your Address
Book, you could get a notification screen that looks like the one in the illustration above for caller Gloria Grant.
End a Call
There are a few ways you can end your phone call:
• If you are in the Phone application, select the
button.
• If you are in an application other than Phone, press Menu
• Regardless of where you are, press Back
April 15, 2003
then select End Call.
.
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
67
Making Phone Calls
Your Call Log
Your Call Log lists the calls that you have either:
• received (“incoming”),
• placed (“outgoing”), or
• didn’t pick up (“missed”)
The Log stores up to 10 calls in each of the three categories (Incoming, Outgoing, or Missed), for a total of 30
calls. When you reach the maximum limit in one of the categories, the oldest call is removed from the Log to
make room for the new call. You can also clear your Log at any time (read more in Clear Your Call Log on page
70).
Views of Your Call Log
The Log is convenient because you can view your calls by category if you want. Your Log holds a history of your
last 100 calls (first in-first out method of storing). Here’s how you can set your Call Log view:
1
Press Menu
then select Call Log [
the view you last selected.
2
From the Call Log screen, press Menu
+ L]. The Call Log opens in either the default view (All Calls), or in
then select the view you want to see:
• All Calls
• Incoming
• Outgoing
• Missed
If you don’t have any calls in the category you selected, the screen will display the message “No calls in Call
Log”.
3
The view you select “sticks” until you change it from the menu. Note that your currently-selected view is
indicated by a bullet in the menu (“Incoming” in the example below):
An example Call Log is shown below, with the view set to All Calls:
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
68
Making Phone Calls
Note the call category icons:
- Incoming
- Outgoing
- Missed
Place a Call From the Log
You can use your Call Log to return or make calls. Here’s how:
1
Press Menu
2
Scroll to highlight the number you want to call, then press the wheel. The context menu appears, with Call
Again selected by default.
then select Call Log [
+ L]. Your Call Log appears.
3
Press the wheel to place the call.
Add/Edit Speed Dial from the Log
If one of your Log entries is also on your Speed Dial list, you can easily edit this entry from the Log. If an entry
in your Log is not on your Speed Dial list, you can easily add the number to your Speed Dial list from the Log:
1
Press Menu
2
Scroll to highlight the number you want to call, then press Menu
Speed Dial... (the appropriate entry will appear).
then select Call Log [
+ L]. Your Call Log appears.
3
Either the Edit Speed Dial Entry or New Speed Dial Entry dialog box appears, as appropriate.
4
Type or edit the Shortcut, Name, and Number information.
5
Select Create to dismiss the dialog box and save the changes.
and select Add to Speed Dial... or Edit
Add Contact List from the Log
If one of your Log entries is also in your Address Book, you can easily edit this entry from the Log. If an entry in
your Log is not in your Address Book, you can easily add that contact to your Address Book from the Log:
1
Press Menu
2
Scroll to highlight the name/number you want to add or edit, then press Menu
Contacts... or Edit Contact... (the appropriate entry will appear).
3
Either the Add to Address Book or Edit Address Book dialog box appears, as appropriate, with the caller’s
existing information filled in, or (if a new contact) the caller’s name and number filled in--if that information
is available. The Add to Address book dialog box look like the following:
4
Complete or edit the fields, as you wish. When finished, select Add or Edit (as appropriate).
April 15, 2003
then select Call Log [
+ L]. Your Call Log appears.
and select Add to
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
69
Making Phone Calls
5
The contact information is saved and you are returned to the Phone application.
Clear Your Call Log
To remove all entries in all three Call Log categories (incoming, outgoing, and missed), do the following while in
the Phone application:
1
Press Menu
then select Call Log [
2
Press Menu
Log”.
then select Clear Call Log. All calls will disappear and your screen will report “No calls in Call
+ L]. Your Call Log appears.
Listen to Voice Mail
There are several ways you can call your voice mailbox to retrieve your voice mail.
• From a land line, call your voice mailbox number.
• Using your device keyboard, press and hold the #1 key for at least two seconds (this is the speed dial
shortcut to voice mail). The call to your voice mailbox is placed.
Phone Settings
You can set a variety of preferences from your Phone Settings screen. To open the Phone Settings screen, do the
following while in the Phone application:
From the main Phone screen, press Menu
then select Settings. The Phone Settings screen appears:
My Device Phone Number
Just in case you forget your device’s phone number, it’s shown on this screen.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
70
Making Phone Calls
Total Call Timer and Reset
If you are keeping track of your calling time and need to reset the time to zero, select the Reset button.
Set Up Call Forwarding & Voice Mail
If you don’t want to answer your phone for some reason and want the call to forward to another number (voice
mail or somewhere else), you set this up by doing the following while in the Phone application:
1
From the main Phone screen, press Menu
2
In the Settings section, scroll to highlight Call Forwarding & Voice Mail, then press the wheel. The Set Up
Forwarding screen opens. The currently-selected (active) forwarding option is the one selected on the pop-up
menu.
then select Settings. The Phone Settings screen appears.
3
You have the following forwarding options:
• Forward to Voice Mail
• Forward All Calls
You can choose to forward to Voice Mail or Other... If you select Other..., a dialog box opens in which you
must type the other number:
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
71
Making Phone Calls
• Forward to Custom Number
For each call situation (Busy, Unanswered, or Out-of-Range), you can select a forwarding number.
Again, you can choose from Voice Mail, Other..., or Disable (to disable forwarding). If you select Other...,
then the Forwarding dialog box opens, in which you must type the other number.
To turn off forwarding altogether, select the Disable option for each of the three call situations.
Set Up Phone Ringtones
You can set up your device so that you’re notified of an incoming call or new voice mail by a ringtone you select.
You do this from the Phone Settings screen:
1
From the main Phone screen, press Menu
2
In the Settings section, scroll to highlight Ringtones then press the wheel. The Set Up Ringtones screen
opens:
then select Settings. The Phone Settings screen appears.
3
If you do not want a to be notified of a new incoming call or voice mail, make sure the check boxes are clear.
If you do want to be notified, then select the appropriate check box.
4
If you have selected a check box, then open the ringtone category pop-up menu by pressing the wheel.
• For an incoming phone call, select from:
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
72
Making Phone Calls
• For new voice mail, select from:
Note that the category currently in effect is highlighted.
5
You’ll see the ringtones available from that category in the pop-up menu:
6
Press Back
.
to save your settings.
Set Up Speed Dial
You can store up to eight speed dial numbers (#2 - #9). Shortcut #1 is permanently reserved for voice mail.
You can add new or edit existing speed dial numbers from the Phone Settings > Speed Dial screen. Read
details in Manage Your Speed Dial List on page 60.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
73
Instant Messaging
8. Instant Messaging
What could be more fun than sending instant messages while you’re on the go? Not much! Read all about how
to use the AOL Instant MessengerTM service in this chapter:
• Instant Messaging Splash Screen on page
74
• Keyboard Shortcuts on page 75
• Add a Screen Name on page 75
• Sign On on page 76
• Sign Off on page 77
• Switch Screen Names on page 77
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Buddy List Screen on page 78
Manage Groups on page 79
Manage Buddies on page 80
IM Conversations on page 82
Set an Away Message on page 83
Instant Messaging Settings on page 84
Instant Messaging Splash Screen
To open the Instant Messaging application, first press Jump, then scroll to highlight the AIM® icon in the lefthand “ring” of applications. You will see the AOL Instant MessengerTM “splash” screen on the right side of the
screen when you’ve highlighted the AIM® application icon:
The splash screen lists all your active conversations along with the buddy screen name and the conversation
number. The screen also tells you how many of your buddies are online at the time and the screen name you’re
currently using.
Note! You must press the wheel to open the AIM application before you can use the conversation shortcuts
(
) shown on the Jump screen.
If you are out-of-network and therefore unable to connect to AIM, you will see an X in the radio signal area of
the notifications bar:
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
74
Instant Messaging
Keyboard Shortcuts
While using AIM, you can use the following keyboard shortcuts for menu items:
Send Message To...
+M
New Buddy
+N
Add Buddy...
+N
Edit
+E
Discard...
End Conversation
Open a particular
conversation
+.
+ <conversation number>
Note that the shortcut keys to conversations only work
while in the AIM application, not while on the Jump screen.
Add a Screen Name
Before you can use AIM on your device, you must have an AOL Instant Messenger account. If you don’t
already have an AOL or AIM account, no problem! Just follow the instructions below.
1
From the AOL Instant Messenger sign on screen, select New User from the Screen Name pop-up, then
select the Sign On button.
2
The New User dialog box opens:
Select the Create New Screen Name button; you’ll be taken to the new AIM Registration page via the
device Web Browser.
3
Complete the online forms that appear on your screen. When you’re done, you’ll be returned to the AIM Sign
On screen, with your new screen name showing as one of the options in the Screen Name pop-up menu:
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
75
Instant Messaging
Sign On
Once you have at least one screen name, you’re ready to sign on!
Signing On for the First Time
1
From the Jump screen, select AOL Instant Messenger. The Sign On screen appears.
2
Type your Screen Name and Password in the fields. To save yourself the trouble of typing these again, select
the Save check box.
3
Scroll to highlight the Sign On button, then press the wheel to sign on.
4
This screen name will now appear in the Screen Name pop-up menu.
Signing On After the First Time
1
From the Jump screen, select AOL Instant Messenger. The Sign On screen appears.
2
The last screen name you used to sign in appears pre-populated in the Screen Name field. If you’ve selected
the Save check box, then your password is also pre-populated. If you want to use this screen name, select
the Sign On button.
3
If you want to use a different screen name to sign on, either type a screen name and password directly in the
fields, or use the Screen Name pop-up menu.This menu lists all the screen names that have been used to
sign in to AIM on your device.
Note that if this is the first time you’ve signed in to AIM using your device, there will be no entries in the popup menu (except New User and Remove Name...).
4
To open the pop-up menu, scroll to highlight
, then press the wheel. The pop-up appears:
Scroll to highlight the screen name you want to use to sign on, then press the wheel.
5
Type your password. Again, if you want the device to remember this screen name/password combination,
select the Save check box.
6
Select the Sign On button.
7
If you want to add an existing AOL screen name to the list, or remove a screen name, read Add a Screen
Name on page 75 and Remove Existing Screen Name on page 77.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
76
Instant Messaging
Sign Off
To sign off from AIM at any time, press Menu
and select Sign Off.
Switch Screen Names
You can switch screen names at any time:
1
From any of the AIM screens, press Menu
2
From the Screen Name pop-up menu, scroll to highlight the screen name you want to use to sign on, then
press the wheel.
then select Sign Off. The Sign On screen appears.
3
Select the Sign On button.
Remove Existing Screen Name
You can remove one or more names from your Screen Name pop-up menu. Note that if you do this, you will
not be deleting either your AIM or AOL account, you will just be removing the screen name from the list.
You can always add the name back in later by typing it in Screen Name/Password fields and then signing in.
It’s easy to remove a name:
1
From the Sign On screen, open the Screen Name pop-up menu and select Remove Name. The Remove
Screen Name(s) dialog appears:
2
Scroll to highlight the pop-up menu and press the wheel to open it:
Scroll to highlight the name you wish to remove.
3
Scroll to highlight the Remove button, then press the wheel. The name you’ve removed will not appear on
the Screen name pop-up menu.
4
To remove more names, select another name from the pop-up menu, then select Remove.
5
Continuing removing until finished, then select Done
.
Tip: To put a removed screen name back on the Screen Names pop-up menu, simply sign in using that screen
name by typing the Screen Name and Password manually on the Sign In screen.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
77
Instant Messaging
The Buddy List Screen
The Buddy List screen is your main view into the AOL Instant Messaging service. The screen shows a grouped
listing of all your buddies:
At the very top of the screen in the title bar you’ll see your screen name.
Next, all the groups you have created are listed and marked with a group icons, with the buddies in collapsible
lists.
• To open (expand) a group’s list, scroll to highlight the group name, then press the wheel. The group icon
“opens”:
.
• To collapse the list, press again: the buddy names disappear and the group icon “closes”:
.
With the group contents expanded, to the far left of each buddy screen name you’ll see their open conversation
number (if you have a conversation open with them), and to the left there is an availability/status icon:
Buddy is away (start a conversation to view their away message).
You’ve blocked this “buddy”.
The buddy is idle.
You have a new message from this buddy.
The buddy has signed on (icon displays only a few seconds).
The buddy has signed off (icon displays only a few seconds).
Buddies who are “offline” are shown in the Offline folder in italic font face.
Running vertically down the right side of the screen, all the conversations with unread messages are symbolized
by little balloons, with the conversation number in the balloon. Note also that if you have an unread message,
you will see the AIM icon in the title bar:
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
78
Instant Messaging
Manage Groups
You use “groups” to organize your buddies, much like you use folders to organize your email and SMS messages.
You can create new groups, rename existing groups, and discard existing groups. Note, however, that you
cannot discard the “system” group, Offline.
Add a Group
To add a new group to your Buddy List, do the following while in the IM application:
1
If your Buddy List isn’t displayed, press Menu
2
Scroll to highlight one of the existing groups, then press Menu
dialog box opens:
3
Type the new group Name.
4
Select Done
then select Buddy List
.
and select New Group... The New Group
. The group is added to your list.
Rename a Group
Once you’ve created a group, you can change the group’s name:
1
If your Buddy List isn’t displayed, press Menu
2
Scroll to highlight one of the existing groups, then press Menu
Rename Group dialog box opens:
3
Edit the new group Name.
4
Select Done
then select Buddy List
.
and select Rename... [
+ E]. The
. The group is displayed with its new name on your Buddy List.
Discard a Group
You can discard any of the groups you’ve created (along with the Buddies in that group). You cannot, however,
discard the Offline group, which has a special status as a “system group”.
1
If your Buddy List isn’t displayed, press Menu
2
Scroll to highlight the group you wish to discard.
3
Press Menu
4
If you’re sure you want to remove this group and all its contents (buddies), select Discard. Note that if you
discard the buddies, they will be removed from your Buddy List altogether.
then select Discard [
then select Buddy List
.
]. A confirmation dialog opens.
Otherwise, to cancel the action and keep the buddy on your list, press Cancel
April 15, 2003
.
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
79
Instant Messaging
Manage Buddies
Using AIM, you can add Instant Messaging buddies, edit their list names and group, and remove them.
Add a Buddy
To add a buddy to your list, follow the steps below:
1
If your Buddy List isn’t displayed, press Menu
2
Press Menu
then select New Buddy... [
then select Buddy List
.
+ N]. The New Buddy dialog box appears:
3
Type the Buddy Name, and in the File in pop-up menu, select the group in which you want to file the buddy.
4
Select Done
. The buddy is added to your list!
Tip: If you’re having a conversation with a person not on your Buddy List, you can add them to your list quickly
by pressing Menu
then selecting New Buddy... [ + N]. Their screen name is pre-populated in the New
Buddy dialog box.
Edit a Buddy
Once you’ve added a buddy, you can change what group the buddy is in, and how you’re notified when the
buddy signs on/off or sends you a message. To edit a buddy, do the following while in the IM application:
1
If your Buddy List isn’t displayed, press Menu
2
Press Menu
April 15, 2003
then select Edit... [
then select Buddy List
.
+ E]. The Edit Buddy screen displays:
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
80
Instant Messaging
3
From this screen you can:
• Change the group in which you’ve filed the buddy.
• Set alerts (notifications) for when your buddy signs on, signs off, or sends you a new message.
4
After making your edits, press Menu
• Select Cancel [
• Select Done
then:
+ .] to cancel all changes.
to save your changes.
Discard a Buddy
To remove a buddy from your list, do the following while in the IM application:
1
If your Buddy List isn’t displayed, press Menu
2
Scroll to highlight the screen name of the buddy you wish to discard.
3
Press Menu
4
If you’re sure you want to remove this buddy, select Discard. Otherwise, to cancel the action and keep the
buddy on your list, press Cancel .
then select Discard [
then select Buddy List
.
]. A confirmation dialog opens.
Block/Unblock Buddies
If you want to block messages from a particular buddy, you can easily do so while in the IM application:
1
If your Buddy List isn’t displayed, press Menu
2
Scroll to highlight the screen name of the buddy you want to block.
3
Press Menu
4
The buddy’s screen name still appears on your Buddy List, but now it’s in the Offline group and the
.
then select Block.
“forbidden” icon
5
then select Buddy List
appears to next to the buddy’s name:
To unblock messages from this buddy, highlight their screen name in the Offline group and select Unblock
from the menu. The screen name moves under the group you had previously assigned to them and you will
start receiving messages from this buddy again.
You can also unblock one or more buddies from the Settings screen, as described in Manage Blocked Users
List on page 86.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
81
Instant Messaging
IM Conversations
Conversations are one-on-one chat sessions you have with your online buddies. With AIM, you can have up to 10
online conversations going at the same time. This section explains how to start and end conversations, as well as
how to keep track of all the conversations you have going at one time!
Start/End an IM Conversation
To send a message to one of your buddies, follow the instructions below.
1
From the Jump screen, select AOL Instant Messenger. The Sign On screen appears.
2
Sign on to AIM using the instructions in either:
• Signing On for the First Time on page 76
• Signing On After the First Time on page 76
3
If your Buddy List doesn’t display, press Menu
4
From the Buddy List screen, you can start a conversation screen in either of two ways:
then select Buddy List
.
• Method 1: Scroll to highlight the screen name of the buddy with whom you want to message, then press
the wheel. A conversation screen opens.
Tip: If you have a long Buddy List, to find a buddy’s screen name quickly, start typing the first few
characters of the buddy’s screen name and the auto-find feature will highlight the closest matching screen
name.
• Method 2: Press Menu
box opens:
then select Send Message To... [
+ M]. The New Instant Message dialog
In the Send to text box, type the screen name of the buddy you want to message. You can also open the
pop-up menu and select a screen name (all your buddies are listed there). Select Start Conversation
(or press Return). A conversation screen with this buddy opens with your initial message showing.
5
You use the lower panel to type your messages. Here’s an example of a conversation-in-progress:
Note! If you send a message and it appears in the top panel in italics, this indicates that you’ve been
temporarily disconnected from the IM service. You will be reconnected automatically as soon as possible, at
which time your message will appear in regular font, not italic.
6
To end a conversation, press Menu
April 15, 2003
then select End Conversation [
+ .].
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
82
Instant Messaging
Tip: If you want to Sign Off and end all your conversations at once, simply return to the Buddy List screen, press
Menu
then select Sign Off.
IM Conversation Indicators
Most every screen you view within Instant Messaging, including the splash screen, contains balloon indicators
, one for each active conversation in which you have an unread message.
In addition, each open conversation is numbered and usually displays to the right of the buddy name in any of
the lists
. If you’re in the AIM application and you press Menu
conversation will display on the screen and become active.
+ <conversation number>, that
Switch Between IM Conversations
The easiest way to switch between conversations is to press Menu
+ <conversation number>.
Set an Away Message
Tip: To create new custom away message categories, you must go to your Web browser client on your computer
and edit or create them there.
To set an away message you must first be signed on to AIM (read more in Sign On on page 76). Once you’re
signed on:
1
If your Buddy List isn’t displayed, press Menu
2
Press Menu
3
A pop-up menu opens listing all your possible away categories. The default categories are shown in the
example below. (You can create new categories only from the AIM Web browser client on your computer.)
4
Scroll to highlight the away message you want to select, then press the wheel.
5
If you select I’m Away, then a new dialog box will open in which you can type the message that will be sent
to the sender while you’re away:
April 15, 2003
then select Buddy List
.
then select Away Messages...
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
83
Instant Messaging
After you type your I’m Away message and press Set, the I’m Away dialog box will stay open until you return
and select the I’m Back button:
6
If you select one of the other unavailable messages, The I’m Away dialog box opens with a standard (but
appropriate) message. This dialog box will remain on your screen in Instant Messaging until you press the
I’m Back button.
7
While you’re away, other device users will see the Away icon
8
To change your status from away to available, select the I’m Back button.
next to your name in their Buddy List.
Instant Messaging Settings
You can set many preferences from the Settings screen. To open this screen, do the following while in the IM
application:
From either the IM Sign On screen or the Buddy List screen, press Menu
screen appears:
then select Settings. The Settings
From this screen you can:
• Set Up Accept Messages on page 85
• Play Buddy Alert Rings on page 85
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
84
Instant Messaging
• Manage Blocked Users List on page 85
Set Up Accept Messages
You can set up AIM so that if someone not on your Buddy List sends you an instant message, you will first see
an alert asking you if you want to accept the message. To set this up, do the following:
1
From the Buddy List screen, press Menu
2
The Show “Accept Message” Dialog Box section is at the top of the screen. If you want to see the dialog
box when someone not on your Buddy List sends you a message, scroll to highlight the check box, then press
the wheel to select it. If you want to turn off Accept Message, clear the check box by highlighting the check
box, then press the wheel to clear it.
then select Settings. The Settings screen appears.
3
With Accept Message checked, when you receive a message from someone not on your Buddy List, you’ll get
an alert like the following:
4
Choose from the following courses of action:
• Block User - The sender of the message will be blocked from sending you any messages, including the
one they’re trying to send. You won’t see any more Accept Message dialog boxes for this sender, until you
“unblock” them. (Read more in Block/Unblock Buddies on page 81.)
• Decline - The sender of the message will be blocked from sending you any messages, including the one
they’re trying to send, for as long as you are signed in. The next time you sign in, if this person sends you
another message, you’ll receive the Accept Message dialog box again.
• Yes - You will see the message from the sender.
Play Buddy Alert Rings
In order for Buddy Alert Rings to work, you must enable these alerts from the Settings screen.
1
From the Buddy List screen, press Menu
2
Look at the Play Buddy Alert Rings section of the screen:
April 15, 2003
then select Settings. The Settings screen appears.
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
85
Instant Messaging
To enable Buddy Alert Rings, scroll to highlight the Play Buddy Alert Rings check box, then press the
wheel to select it. (To disable Buddy Alerts, select the check box again to clear it.)
3
Once you enable Buddy Alert Rings, you can select different alert rings for the following events:
• Sign On - Ring sounds when a buddy signs on.
• Sign Off - Ring sounds when a buddy signs off.
• New Message - Ring sounds when you receive a new instant message.
To pick an alert, first select a ringtone “category” from the pop-up menu on the left, then select a
corresponding “sound” from the pop-up menu on the right.
4
Your changes are saved as soon as you make them.
You can override these settings for individual buddies on the Edit buddy screens. Read more in Edit a Buddy on
page 80.
Manage Blocked Users List
If you do not want to receive messages from an individual on your Buddy List, you can “block” messages from
them. The instructions for doing this, and unblocking a buddy’s messages, are in Block/Unblock Buddies on page
81. You can also unblock buddies from the Settings screen, as described below.
1
From the Buddy List screen, press Menu
2
Scroll down to the bottom of the screen to the Blocked User(s) List section:
3
Scroll to highlight the screen name of the buddy you want to block, then press the wheel to select it. The
Blocked User dialog box opens:
4
The Unblock
button is selected by default. Press the wheel to select it and unblock the buddy. (To cancel
your action and keep your buddy on the blocked list, select the Cancel button.)
5
Once you unblock a buddy, their screen name appears again under the assigned group name on the Buddy
List screen.
April 15, 2003
then select Settings. The Settings screen appears.
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
86
Email Messaging
9. Email Messaging
The Email application on your T-Mobile device is easy to use and rich in features. Not only do you get your own
device email account, but you can also pull in other email from up to three of your POP3 accounts. Read the
topics in this chapter to take full advantage of this flexible application.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Email Splash Screen on page 87
Browse Email Screen on page 88
Status Indicators on page 89
Keyboard Shortcuts on page 89
View Your Email on page 91
Move Messages to Folders on page 93
Send Messages on page 94
• Add Email Senders to the Address Book on page 95
• Add Email Recipients to the Address Book on page
96
• Discard Email Messages on page 97
• Manage Your Email Accounts on page 98
• Manage Email Folders on page 102
• Email Settings on page 104
• Space Limitations on page 107
The Email Splash Screen
To open the Email application, first press Jump, then scroll to highlight the Email icon in the left-hand “ring” of
applications. You will see the Email “splash” screen on the right side of the screen when you’ve highlighted the
Email application icon:
The splash screen is handy because it shows all your unread messages, sorted first by folder then order
received (newest message first).
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
87
Email Messaging
Browse Email Screen
The Browse Email screen is your main view into the Email application:
The Browse Email screen lists all your emails, grouped into folders, ordered by date. (Read more about ordering
this list in Sort Email Messages on page 92.)
In the illustration above you’ll see the five “system folders”--Inbox, Saved, Sent, Drafts, and Trash--plus all the
folders you have created to organize your emails, identified by a folder-type icon:
To the right of the folder name, if it has unread messages, the number of unread messages is shown in
parentheses. In the example above, Inbox (1) contains one unread message. The Inbox is shown in “expanded”
view (its list of emails is showing), with the first message in bold, indicating it is “unread”. The Saved folder is
shown collapsed. The Sent folder contents are collapsed, as are the Drafts folder contents (empty folders are
always shown collapsed, of course). The Trash folder is shown in expanded view and contains two emails.
As shown in the illustration above, individual emails are grouped in collapsible folder lists. To open (expand) a
folder’s list of emails, scroll to highlight the folder name, then press the wheel. To collapse the list, press again.
Press again to expand, etc.
Tip: To scroll quickly between folders, press the ALT key while using the D-pad up and down arrows.
To open an individual email, scroll to highlight the email, then press the wheel. To learn more about reading your
email, read View Your Email on page 91. To learn about adding folders, read Manage Email Folders on page 102.
To the left of items in the Browse Email screen, there could be an icon that indicates the status of a message. To
interpret these icons, as well as understand the folder icons, read Status Indicators on page 89.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
88
Email Messaging
Status Indicators
From the Browse Messages screen, in the title bar, you’ll always see how full your mailbox is, by percentage and
megabyte (MB).
Icons shown the to left of each folder name or email message tell you their status. Plus, all unread messages
are shown in bold. Here’s what the icons mean:
You have replied to this message.
You forwarded this message.
This email has an attachment.
There was an error when sending this email. A few errors include: the message was not
sent at all, the message was sent but could not be saved to the Sent folder because you
reached your mailbox quota, the message was sent but without the forwarded attachment
because the original message no longer exists, and so on. You will only see this status
indicator next to messages in the Sent folder.
This email is waiting to be sent. You will see this status indicator next to messages in the
Sent and Drafts folders.
This email is being sent. You will see this status indicator next to messages in the Sent
and Drafts folders.
Icons identifying the Inbox folder, with contents collapsed/expanded.
Icons identifying the Sent folder, with contents collapsed/expanded.
Icons identifying the Saved folder, with contents collapsed/expanded.
Icons identifying the Drafts folder, with contents collapsed/expanded.
Icons identifying a user-defined folder, with contents collapsed/expanded.
Icons identifying the Trash folder, with contents collapsed/expanded.
Keyboard Shortcuts
While using the Email application, you can use keyboard shortcuts to open options from the following Email
menus:
•
•
•
•
•
Browse Email Menu Shortcuts (with message highlighted)
Browse Email Menu Shortcuts (with folder highlighted)
Compose Menu Shortcuts
Settings Menu Shortcuts
Accounts Menu Shortcuts
Each menu’s shortcuts are listed in the tables below.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
89
Email Messaging
Browse Email Menu Shortcuts (with message highlighted)
New Message...
+N
Reply...
+R
Reply All...
+L
Forward...
+J
Add Contact...
+@
Move...
+O
Discard
Check for New Email
+U
Mark Read/Unread
+K
More options in Email:Read view:
Next
Previous
Browse Email Menu Shortcuts (with folder highlighted)
New Message...
+N
Rename... (folder)
+E
Empty...(folder)
Mark all msgs (in
folder) as read
+K
Compose Menu Shortcuts
Send
+M
Save as Draft
Attach Photo...
+P
Cancel
+.
Settings Menu Shortcuts
Done
Cancel
+.
Accounts Menu Shortcuts
Done
New Account
Discard
Cancel
April 15, 2003
+N
+
+.
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
90
Email Messaging
View Your Email
To view a list of all your email messages, use the Browse Email screen. You can get to this screen via the Jump
screen after selecting Email. If you are already in one of the Email screens, press Back
until the Browse Email
screen appears:
Read more in Browse Email Screen on page 88.
Read an Email
To open an individual email for reading, do the following while in the Email application:
1
From the Browse Email screen, make sure the folder in which you’ve stored the email is shown in expanded
view. (Scroll to highlight the folder name, then press the wheel to expand/collapse the emails contained in
the folder.)
2
Scroll to highlight the message you want to read, then press the wheel to open it. Your email contents display
in the Email:Read screen.
3
To dismiss the email and return to the Browse Email screen, press Back
.
Open an Attachment
You know an email has an attachment if there is a paperclip icon ( ) just to the left of the message, as
displayed in the Browse Email screen. Attachments that are supported include other emails, as well as files of the
following formats:
• .gif
• .jpg, .jpeg
• .png
• .bmp
• .doc (Word)
• .pdf (Adobe Acrobat)
To open a supported attachment, first open the email, then use the wheel to scroll to the bottom of the email
message where the attachment will appear.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
91
Email Messaging
Open Hypertext Links in Messages
If a hypertext link is embedded in an email message (including attached email addresses and Web site
addresses), these links will appear at the bottom of the email message as a “selectable” button.
Change the Status of an Email to Unread
When you have an unread email message, it is listed on the Email splash screen, and it is shown in bold on the
Browse Email screen. Once you’ve read the message, it disappears from the splash screen and appears in
regular type on the Browse Email screen. There may be times when you want to mark a read message as
unread, and vice versa. You can do this from either the Browse Email screen or the Email:Read screen:
• From the Browse Email screen, scroll to highlight the message you want to mark as read/unread, then
press [ + K]. The message changes status. (Unread messages appear in bold; read messages appear in
regular font.)
• From the Browse Email screen, scroll to highlight the message you want to mark as read/unread, then
press the wheel to open the message. Press Menu
then select Mark Unread/Mark Read [ + K]. The
message changes status.
To mark all messages in a folder as read/unread, highlight the folder name in the Browse Email screen, then
press
+ K.
Sort Email Messages
You can decide how you want messages to be sorted on the Browse Email screen. Note that the sort you select
applies to all folders.
1
From the Browse Email screen, press Menu
then select Sort.... The Sort Messages dialog box opens:
By default, messages are sorted by Date Received, with newer messages appearing at the top.
2
If you want to change this default sort behavior, you can choose from:
• Date Received - further specify sort order:
-
Newer messages at top
-
Newer messages at bottom
• Subject - further specify sort order:
-
A .. Z
-
Z .. A
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
92
Email Messaging
• Sender/Recipient - further specify sort order: (Note that the sort is ordered by display name, if one is
available, rather than email address.)
-
A .. Z
-
Z .. A
• Size - further specify sort order:
3
-
Larger messages at top
-
Larger messages at bottom
When finished, press Done
to save changes, or select Cancel to dismiss the window with no changes.
Move Messages to Folders
You can move messages to different folders by doing the following while in the Email application:
1
From the Browse Email screen, scroll to highlight the folder that holds the email you want to move, then
press the wheel to expand its contents.
2
Scroll to highlight the email you want to move.
3
Press Menu
then select Move... [
+ O]. The Move Message to Folder dialog box appears.
All folders (except for the Drafts and Sent folders, and the folder in which the email currently is being stored)
are shown in the list.
4
Scroll to highlight the folder into which you want to move the message, then press the wheel. The message
moves.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
93
Email Messaging
Send Messages
Compose a New Message
To write a new email message, do the following while in the Email application:
1
From the Browse Email screen, press Menu
opens:
2
Complete your message:
then select New Message... [
+ N]. The Compose screen
• From field - If you have set up POP3 accounts, then you can choose what address you want to use to
send the email. To open the pop-up menu with your addresses, scroll to highlight the From field, then
press the wheel.
• To field - Start typing the first or last name of a contact in the To field, and the Email application will
communicate with the Address Book and offer you completion suggestions (based on your existing
Address Book contacts). The suggestions appear in a pop-up menu. Use the wheel to highlight, then press
to select one of the address suggestions, or you can type a new one directly in the To field.
To create a new line so you can add more recipients, do one of the following:
-
type a semicolon (;)
-
type a comma (,)
-
press
-
press the spacebar
-
press Menu
+ RETURN
then select Add To
• CC and BCC fields - Optional fields you can display by opening the Compose menu and selecting Add CC
or Add BCC. You cannot show both BCC and CC fields; only one or the other. To create a new line so you
can add more recipients, press the comma (,) key or press
+ RETURN. You can also add a new CC or
BCC line by pressing Menu
then selecting Add CC or Add BCC.
• Subject field - Type your subject line; a subject line can be up to 256 characters in length.
• Message body - Type your message body; the message body can be up to 256 K.
• Signature - Edit or use the default message you set up in Accounts > Signature; keep your signature to
four lines.
3
To send your message, scroll to highlight the Send button, then press the wheel. Or you can open the
Compose screen menu then select Send [ + M].
4
To discard your message, open the Compose screen menu and press Cancel [
April 15, 2003
+ .].
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
94
Email Messaging
Note about attachments: You cannot attach files to emails you compose on your device (except for photos),
but you can forward emails with attachments. Read more in Open an Attachment on page 91 and Email Photos
on page 145.
Save an Email Message as a Draft
If you are composing an email message and want to save it so you can resume composing or sending at a later
time, save your message in the Drafts folder:
1
With the message you’re composing on the screen, press Menu
2
The message moves to the Drafts folder.
then select Save as Draft
.
3
To re-open a draft message, from the Browse Email screen scroll to highlight the draft message you want to
open, then press the wheel. The message reopens in the Compose screen for editing.
Note: If, after editing, you still want to keep the message as a draft, be sure to Save as Draft again--don’t
discard the message or it will be permanently discarded; that is, not saved to your Trash folder from which you
could retrieve it.
Reply to an Email Message
To reply to an email message, do the following while in the Email application:
1
From the Browse Email screen, scroll to highlight the email to which you want to reply. Open the email if you
wish by pressing the wheel.
2
Press Menu
then select one of:
• Reply... [
+ R] to address your reply only to the individual who sent you the message.
• Reply All [
+ L] to address your reply to all individuals copied on the message.
3
The Reply screen opens with the To: field filled in according to the menu option you selected.
4
Finish composing your email and then select Send [
+ M] when ready.
Forward an Email Message
To forward an email message to one or more addresses, do the following while in the Email application:
1
From the Browse Email screen, scroll to highlight the message you want to forward. Open the email if you
wish by pressing the wheel.
2
Press Menu
3
The Forward screen opens, with a new message ready for you to address. The forwarded message, including
any attachments, is appended to the end of the new message.
4
Finish composing your message and then select Send [
then select Forward... [
+ J].
+ M] when ready.
Add Email Senders to the Address Book
If you receive an email message from an individual you would like to include as a contact in the Address Book,
do the following while in the Email application:
1
From the Browse Email screen, scroll to highlight the message whose sender you want to add as a contact.
Open the message if you wish by pressing the wheel.
2
Oress Menu
April 15, 2003
then select Add Contact [
+ @].
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
95
Email Messaging
3
The Add Contact to Address Book dialog box opens with the new contact’s name and email address added:
4
Complete the information, then select Add
.
Read more about editing contact information in the Address Book application in 11. Keeping Contacts in the
Address Book on page 116.
Note! If you add a sender that is already listed as a contact in your Address Book, you will create a duplicate
entry for that contact.
Add Email Recipients to the Address Book
If you compose an email and want to add any of the recipients to your Address Book, do the following while in
the Email application:
1
From the Browse Email screen, press Menu
2
Compose the new message at least to the point where you have listed the recipients.
3
Save the message as a draft by pressing Add , or (if you’ve set up in Settings to save outgoing messages
to the Sent folder) send it (assuming you’re done composing).
4
Highlight the message (in either the Drafts or Sent folder). Don’t open it if it’s a draft.
5
Press Menu
6
If you have only one email recipient, the dialog box shown in Add Email Senders to the Address Book on
page 95 appears. Complete the information you want to include in the contact information, then press Add
.
7
If you have more than one email recipient, this dialog box appears:
April 15, 2003
then select Add Contacts [
then select New Message [
+ N].
+ @]. The Add Contact to Address Book dialog box opens.
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
96
Email Messaging
• If you want the first email recipient ([email protected] in the illustration above) added to your
Address Book, select the Include this contact check box (it is selected by default), complete the contact
information you want to include, then select Next. The next recipient’s blank contact information appears.
• Continue through recipients until you reach the final recipient. If there are any recipients you do not want
to include, clear the Include this contact check box before selecting Next.
• When you’ve progressed through the screens for all recipients, select Add All
recipients to your Address Book.
8
to add all the selected
If you want to provide more complete information for the added recipient(s), go to the Address Book
application to edit the contact information. Read more in Edit a Contact on page 121.
Note! If you add an entry that is already listed as a contact in your Address Book, you will create a duplicate
entry for that contact.
Discard Email Messages
To discard an email message:
1
From the Browse Email screen, scroll to highlight the message you want to discard. Open the message if you
wish by pressing the wheel.
2
Press Menu
3
The message is moved to the Trash folder.
then select Discard [
].
To restore a discarded message:
1
From the Browse Email screen, scroll to highlight the Trash folder, then press the wheel to expand its
contents.
2
Scroll to highlight the message you want to restore.
3
Press Menu
4
Scroll to highlight the folder to which you want to restore the message, then press the wheel.
then select Move [
+ O]. The Move Message to Folder dialog box appears.
To empty all messages from the Trash:
1
From the Browse Email screen, press Menu
2
A confirmation dialog box appears. Select Empty Trash to discard the messages in the Trash (permanently);
select Cancel
to keep your messages in the Trash.
April 15, 2003
then select Empty Trash.
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
97
Email Messaging
Manage Your Email Accounts
In addition to the email account that came with your device, you can receive email from (up to) three POP3
accounts you might have with external email providers. You set this up on the Email Accounts screen while in the
Email application:
From the Browse Email screen, press Menu
then select Accounts. The Email Accounts screen appears:
Select the account from which you want to send email messages by default in the Primary Account pop-up
menu. Note that if you discard the account you’ve specified as “primary”, then your device email account will
automatically become your primary account.
The account listed at the top of the page is your device account and cannot be removed. Listed below your
primary account are any other POP3 accounts you may have added.
You can do the following from this screen:
• Add a POP3 Account
• Edit an Email Account
• Discard an Email Account
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
98
Email Messaging
Add a POP3 Account
To add an account, do the following while in the Email application:
1
From the Browse Email screen, press Menu
2
From the Accounts screen, press Menu
opens:
3
Complete the POP Server field.
then select Accounts. The Email Accounts screen opens.
then select New Accounts [
+ N]. The New Accounts screen
This is the name of your email POP server. If you don’t know the name of your email POP server, your email
provider will be able to tell you, or you can reference the table below for samples. If you have a POP email
account through your ISP, contact them for more assistance.
Web Email Provider
Yahoo®Mail
Mail.com
Softhome.net
POP Server
pop.mail.yahoo.com
pop1.mail.com
mail.SoftHome.net
4
Complete the Port field. Unless your email provider has specified otherwise, leave the port at 110.
5
Complete the Username field. This is the name you use to log in to your POP3 account.
6
Complete the Password field. This is the password you use for your POP3 account.
7
Select Save Folder. Open the pop-up menu by pressing the wheel, then scroll to highlight the folder in which
you would like all retrieved mail to be placed. Press the wheel to select it.
Tip: You can create a folder specifically for this purpose; read Manage Email Folders on page 102 for
instructions on creating email folders. If you do create a new folder for this account later, you can edit this
account and change the Save Folder. Read more in Edit an Email Account on page 100.
8
Select Create
to have the system set up the POP email account so you can view it on your device and the
Email Desktop Interface.
Select the More Options button to open the Edit Account screen to set options such as:
• Collect/not collect email from the account.
• Remove retrieved email from POP server as it’s fetched to the device or the Email Desktop Interface.
• From Name/Address
• Reply-To Name/Address
Read about setting these options in Edit an Email Account on page 100.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
99
Email Messaging
Edit an Email Account
To edit an existing account, do the following while in the Email application:
1
From the Browse Email screen, press Menu
2
From this screen you can change how the messages from each of your accounts are signed. Limit your
signature to four lines:
then select Accounts. The Email Accounts screen opens.
3
Scroll to highlight the Edit button
opposite the name of the account you want to edit, then press the
wheel to open that account’s Edit Account screen. The account name is displayed in the title bar
Note! For your primary account, you’ll only be able to edit the fields shown below:
4
In the General section of the screen, you can turn certain functionality on or off:
• The Collect email from this account check box is checked by default. If, at some point in the future, you
want the Email application to stop collecting email messages from the POP3 account, select the check box
to clear the check mark in the box. The account information is saved in case you want the application to
start collecting email messages from that account later.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
100
Email Messaging
• The Remove retrieved email from server is not checked by default. This means that as your POP
messages are fetched to your device and Email Desktop Interface, those messages are also kept on the
POP email server. If you want the messages on the POP server to be removed as they’re downloaded to
your device, then check this box.
5
The Account section on the Edit Account screen contains the basic POP account information you entered
when you first set up the account. You can edit any of the fields if you need to.
You can decide the folder in which you want messages from this POP account delivered. Select from all
existing folders (including those you’ve created) from the Save Folder pop-up menu. Note that if you later
rename the folder you selected, this setting will update automatically.
Also, this section contains fields where you can specify display names and to/from email addresses.
• From Name - Your name as you'd like it to appear on message sent through this account.
• From Address - The email address you’d like to appear in the From field on outgoing messages from this
account.
• Reply-To Name - The email name that will appear in the To field when people reply to a message you
send from this account.
• Reply-To Address - The email address that you want used when people reply to messages sent from this
account.
6
When you are finished making your edits, select Done
then select Cancel [ + .].
. To cancel any changes you’ve made, press Menu
Discard an Email Account
Note: You cannot discard your device email account (the account listed first in the Accounts screen).
To discard any other email account, do the following while in the Email application:
1
From the Browse Email screen, press Menu
2
Scroll to highlight the
then select Accounts. The Email Accounts screen opens.
3
Open the menu and select Discard [
4
A confirmation dialog box appears. Select OK to discard the account; select Cancel to cancel the deletion.
button opposite the account name you want to discard.
+
].
Send a Photo
To send a photo you’ve taken with your device via an email message, do the following while in the Email
application:
1
From the Browse Email screen, press Menu
appears.
then select New Message [
+ N]. The Compose screen
2
Complete the To, Subject, and Message fields.
3
Press Menu
then select Attach Photo... [ + P] to open your Photo Gallery. Scroll the wheel to highlight,
then press the wheel to select a photo to send. You can select multiple photos. All selected photos have
check marks.
4
When you’ve finished selecting photos, open the menu and select Attach Checked... .
5
Your message returns to the screen, including attached photos.
6
Select Send [
April 15, 2003
+ M] when you’re ready.
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
101
Email Messaging
Manage Email Folders
You can create up to 20 folders in which to store and organize your email messages, in addition to the 5 system
folders (Inbox, Saved, Draft, Sent, and Trash). For more information about the system folders, read the next
topic, The Email System Folders on page 102.
You cannot discard or edit the names of the system folders (Inbox, Saved, Sent, Drafts, Trash), but you can
name the folders you create. To add new, edit, or discard existing user-defined email folders, read the following
topics:
• Create an Email Folder on page 103
• Edit an Existing Email Folder Name on page 103
• Discard an Existing Email Folder and Message Contents on page 103
The Email System Folders
The Email application uses five “system” folders--Inbox, Saved, Drafts, Sent, and Trash--shown in the illustration
below:
Here’s a little more information about each system folder:
• Inbox - The Inbox folder is the default drop point for any new messages you receive. Note that you can
specify that messages from POP3 accounts be dropped into folders you create. (Read more in Manage
Email Folders on page 102.)
• Sent - As you send an email message, the message is displayed in the Sent folder (expanded view), with
its status just to the left. In the illustration above you’ll see the status indicators showing the top message
is being sent (
problem ( ).
), the second is waiting to be sent ( ), and the third was not sent due to a delivery
After a message has been sent, it disappears from the Sent folder, unless you specify in the Email Settings
screen that you want to Save outgoing messages in Sent folder. If you’ve set this preference, a copy of
every message you compose and send will be saved in the Sent folder.
• Saved - If you have specified (in Email Settings) to have the system automatically discard messages when
your mailbox is full (oldest first), you can “save” messages from this auto-deletion process by moving them
to this Saved folder. (Read more in Auto-discard msgs when mailbox is full. on page 106)
• Drafts - If you start composing a message but want to pause in writing it or wait to send it, then you can
save the message in the Drafts folder and later open it and continue. (Read more in Save an Email
Message as a Draft on page 95.)
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
102
Email Messaging
Note that the messages in the Drafts folder are protected from the auto-deletion process. (Read more in
Auto-discard msgs when mailbox is full. on page 106)
• Trash - Every message you discard from other folders is moved to the Trash folder. Discarded messages
accumulate in the Trash until you explicitly use the menu option to Empty Trash. As long as a message
stays in the Trash, however, you can restore it to another folder. (Read more in Discard Email Messages on
page 97.)
Create an Email Folder
To create a new folder, do the following while in the Email application:
1
On the Browse Email screen, scroll to highlight any folder.
2
Press Menu
3
Type the name of your new folder, then press Done
then select New Folder. The New Folder dialog box appears:
.
Your new folder will now appear on the Browse Email screen and is ready to hold messages.
Edit an Existing Email Folder Name
Note: You cannot edit the Inbox, Saved, Sent, Drafts, or Trash folders’ names as they are system folders.
To edit any other folder name, do the following while in the Email application:
1
On the Browse Email screen, scroll to highlight the folder whose name you want to edit.
2
Press Menu
then select Rename... [
Name field, ready for editing:
+ E]. The Edit Folder dialog box appears with the text cursor in the
Note: If you rename a folder that is used to save mail from a POP account, the Save Folder field on that
Accounts screen will update automatically to the new folder name.
3
Make your edit to the name, then press Done
.
Discard an Existing Email Folder and Message Contents
Note: You cannot discard the Inbox, Sent, Drafts, or Trash folders as they are “system” folders. You can,
however, delete all the contents of a system folder by highlighting the folder name, opening the menu and
selecting Empty... [ ].
To discard any other folder (and its contents), do the following while in the Email application:
1
On the Browse Email screen, scroll to highlight the folder you want to discard.
2
Press Menu
April 15, 2003
then select Discard....
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
103
Email Messaging
3
A confirmation dialog box appears, asking if you want to delete the folder and all of its contents. Select
Discard to confirm the deletion, or press Cancel
to cancel the deletion.
Email Settings
You can decide how Email behaves on your own device by specifying your preferences on the Email Settings
screen. Here’s how to open Email Settings screen while you’re in the Email application:
From the Browse Email screen, press Menu
then select Settings. The Email Settings screen appears:
Read more about each setting in the topics below.
Show Message Size/Count
By default, for each message, the Browse Email screen displays message sender, title, and date. If you want to
see more information (how many messages you have in each folder, and how large each message is) then do the
following while in the Email application:
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
104
Email Messaging
1
From the Browse Messages screen, press Menu
2
Look for the section that reads General:
then select Settings. The Email Settings screen appears.
Check the box to turn on the feature. Clear the check box to turn off the feature.
3
Press Back
to save your setting and return to the Browse Email screen. With this feature turned on,
notice the additional information that displays in the the far right columns on the Browse Email screen:
When this check box is not turned on, the view will look similar to the illustration in Browse Email Screen on
page 88.
Set Up Email Ringtones
You can select if and how your device lets you know (or “notifies” you) when a new email has arrived. If you turn
on notifications (explained below), you will receive a balloon notification in the title bar (shown below) and a
ringtone will play when you receive a new message.
To turn on new message notification and to select a ringtone, do the following while in the Email application:
1
From the Browse Email screen, press Menu
April 15, 2003
then select Settings. The Email Settings screen appears.
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
105
Email Messaging
2
Look for the section that reads Ring for receipt of new email.
Note that this option is checked by default, which means new message notifications are turned on and you’ll
hear the default ringtone when you receive a new email. You’ll receive this and the balloon notification no
matter what screen you’re viewing or application you’re in (except no balloon notifications will appear while
you’re playing games).
3
If you want to change the default ringtone, select a notification “category” from the first pop-up menu. In the
example above, “Tunes” has been selected. Depending on what category you’ve selected, you will have
additional sound selections in the pop-up menu to the right. You will hear a preview of the sound when you
select it.
4
Press Back
when you’re finished with your settings. If you don’t want to save the changes, press [
+ .].
Automatic Message Management
To help you manage your mailbox size, the Email Settings screen offers you some ways to keep the total size
down automatically. Remember, your mailbox cannot store more than 6 MB of messages, including attachments.
Once you’ve reached this limit (if you don’t have any of the automatic message management options checked),
new email will “bounce” (be returned to sender).
To set automatical message management, do the following while in the Email application:
1
From the Browse Email screen, press Menu
2
Look for the section that reads Automatic Message Management. You’ll see a number of options:
then select Settings. The Email Settings screen appears.
• Save outgoing messages in Sent folder.
If you want a copy of each email you send to be saved to your Sent folder, check this check box. If you
change your mind at some point, select the check box to clear the check.
• Empty Trash every night.
If you want your Trash to be emptied automatically each night, then check this check box.
• Auto-discard msgs when mailbox is full.
With this option selected, once your mailbox is full, the system will automatically make room for new
messages by permanently discarding old messages, starting with the oldest message. The system looks
for old messages to discard in all your Email folders, except for the Saved and Drafts folders. (Read
more in The Email System Folders on page 102.)
You can further specify that the system not delete messages less than 7 days old by checking the Only
discard messages 7 days or older check box.
3
Press Back
April 15, 2003
when you’re finished with your settings. If you don’t want to save the changes, press [
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
+ .].
106
Email Messaging
Attachment Limits
Another way you can manage the size of your mailbox is to limit the size and types of attachments that the Email
application will deliver to you. Make these settings by doing the following while in the Email application:
1
From the Browse Email screen, press Menu
2
Look for the section that reads Attachment Limits. You’ll see a number of options:
then select Settings. Email Settings screen appears.
3
If you want to set a size limit for attachments, check the box that reads Remove attachments larger than,
then open the pop-up menu and select the maximum size of attachments you want delivered. Select from
100 KB, 250 KB, 500 KB, or 1 MB.
4
If you want attachments removed from your incoming emails, you must check the boxes for the attachment
types you want removed. Note that the attachments that are viewable on the device are grouped at the top
of the list.
5
Press Back
when you’re finished with your settings. If you don’t want to save the changes, press [
+ .].
Space Limitations
You can store up to 6 MB of email messages (including attachments) using the Email application. Once you near
your storage space limit, you will receive a warning and recommendation that you discard some messages and
empty your Trash. If your mailbox is over 75% full, you’ll be alerted to this fact on the Email splash screen.
A more efficient way to handle your space limitation is to have the system automatically remove messages from
your mailbox by setting preferences. This is all described in Automatic Message Management on page 106.
If your mailbox is full, new incoming messages will “bounce”, which means it will be returned to the sender. Note
that you will not be notified when a message bounces.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
107
Phone Messaging
10. Phone Messaging
Phone Messages is a two-way text messaging application that lets you send, receive, and reply to short text
messages directly from your phone. It’s fun! Learn all about Phone Messages by reading the topics in this
chapter:
• Phone Messages Splash Screen on page
108
• Browse Messages Screen on page 109
• Status Indicators on page 110
• Keyboard Shortcuts on page 110
• View Text Messages on page 110
• Sort Text Messages on page 111
• Send Text Messages on page 112
• Add Text Message Senders to the Address
Book on page 113
• Call Back Sender of a Message on page 114
• Discard Messages on page 114
• Retrieve Messages from the Trash on page 115
• Setting Phone Messages Ringtones on page 115
Phone Messages Splash Screen
To open the Phone Messages application, first press Jump, then scroll to highlight the Phone Messages icon in
the left-hand “ring” of applications. You will see the Phone Messages “splash” screen on the right side of the
screen when you’ve highlighted the Phone Messages application icon:
The splash screen shows all your unread text messages in the order received, with the message received
most recently on top. If you press the wheel to open the Phone Messages application, open any of the unread
messages, then return to the splash screen, you’ll see that the message you’ve opened has disappeared from the
splash screen list.
Note: Phone Messages messages are text messages that are delivered via the “Short Message Service”, also
referred to simply as “SMS”.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
108
Phone Messaging
Browse Messages Screen
The Browse Messages screen is your main view into the Phone Messages application. The Browse Messages
screen lists all your text messages, grouped into folders, ordered by date. (Read more about ordering your lists
in Sort Text Messages on page 111.)
Title Bar - The title bar of the Phone Messages screen shows you how many messages you’re storing and the
maximum number of messages that you can store on your device’s SIM card:
Folders - In the illustration of the Browse Message screen above you’ll see the three “system” folders--Inbox,
Outbox, and Trash--identified by a folder-type icon:
To the right of the folder name, the number of unread versus total number of messages is shown in
parentheses.
• In the example above, Inbox (1/3) contains three messages, of which one is unread. The Inbox is shown
in “expanded” view (its list of messages is showing), with the first message in bold, indicating it is
“unread”.
• The Outbox is empty and is shown collapsed. The Outbox is used to hold your messages, only until they
have been sent. Then they disappear from the Outbox and are not stored on your SIM.
• The Trash folder is empty and shown collapsed.
Individual messages are grouped in collapsible folder lists. To open (expand) a folder’s list of messages, use the
wheel to highlight the folder name, then press. To collapse the list, press again. Press again to expand, etc.
Message Sender - If the sender of the text message is in your Address Book, then the phone number will
resolve to a contact name, which displays in the left column. If the sender is not in your Address Book, then the
sender’s phone number will display.
Message Lead-In and Preview - The first few words of the text message will display to the left of the
sender’s name/phone number. The first few lines of the message highlighted will display in the “preview panel”,
which appears just below the list of messages.
Open a Message - To open an individual message, highlight the message and press the wheel. To learn more
about reading your message, read View Text Messages on page 110.
Status Indicators - To the left of each item in the Browse Messages screen is an icon that indicates the status
of the folder or message. To interpret these icons, read Status Indicators on page 110.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
109
Phone Messaging
Status Indicators
Icons shown the to left of each folder name or text message tell you their status. Plus, all unread messages
are shown in bold. Here’s what the icons mean:
You have replied to this message.
You forwarded this message.
There was an error when sending this message. (It wasn’t sent.) You will only see this
status indicator next to messages in the Sent folder.
This message is waiting to be sent. You will only see this status indicator next to
messages in the Sent folder.
This message is being sent. You will only see this status indicator next to messages in
the Sent folder.
Icons identifying the Inbox folder, with contents collapsed/expanded.
Icons identifying the Sent folder, with contents collapsed/expanded.
Icons identifying the Trash folder, with contents collapsed/expanded.
Keyboard Shortcuts
While in the Phone Messages application, you can use keyboard shortcuts to open options from the menus.
Browse Messages Menu Shortcuts
New Message...
+N
Reply...
+R
Forward
+J
Call Back...
+P
Add Contact...
+@
Discard
Compose Message Menu Shortcuts
Send
+M
Add Contact...
+@
Cancel
+.
View Text Messages
To view a list of all your text messages, open the Phone Messages application from the Jump screen. The Browse
Messages screen appears, listing all your messages.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
110
Phone Messaging
Read a Text Message
To open an individual text message for reading, do the following:
1
Make sure the folder in which you’ve stored the message is shown in expanded view. (Press the folder name
to expand/collapse the messages contained in the folder.)
2
Use the wheel to highlight the message; a message preview shows in the lower half of the screen. To have
the message display in full-screen view, then press the wheel. Your message contents display in the Read
screen.
3
To dismiss the message and return to the Browse Messages screen, press Back
.
About Text Message Folders
Phone Messages uses three “system” folders--Inbox, Sent, and Trash.
Here’s a little more information about each system folder:
• Inbox - The Inbox folder is the default drop point for any new messages you receive.
• Sent - As you send a text message, the message is displayed in the Sent folder (expanded view), with its
status just to the left. Possible status indicators include: message is being sent (
to be sent ( ), and message was not sent due to a delivery problem ( ).
), message is waiting
Note: After you send a message, a copy of it remains in the Sent folder until you explicitly delete it.
• Trash - Every message you discard from other folders is moved to the Trash folder. Discarded messages
accumulate in the Trash until you explicitly use the menu option to Empty Trash. As long as a message
stays in the Trash, however, you can retrieve it. (Read more in Retrieve Messages from the Trash on page
115.)
Sort Text Messages
By default, the messages listed in the Browse Messages screen are organized with the newer messages at the
top (ascending order). To change the order in which your messages are displayed in the Browse Messages
screen, do the following:
1
From the Browse Messages screen, press Menu
2
Select the sort option you prefer: newer messages at the top or the bottom of the list.
3
Press Done [ ] to save your setting.
April 15, 2003
and select Sort.... The Sort Messages screen opens:
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
111
Phone Messaging
Send Text Messages
You can send text messages by doing any of the following:
• Compose a New Text Message on page 112
• Reply to a Text Message on page 113
• Forward a Text Message on page 113
• Resend a Text Message on page 113
Compose a New Text Message
To write a new text message you must first open the Compose screen:
1
From the Browse Messages screen, press Menu
screen opens:
2
Complete your message:
then select New Message... [
+ N]. The Compose
• To field - Start typing the first or last name of a contact in the To field, and the Phone Messages
application will communicate with the Address Book and offer you completion suggestions (based on your
existing Address Book contacts). The suggestions appear in a pop-up menu. Use the wheel to highlight,
then press to select one of the address suggestions, or you can type a new one directly in the To field.
• Message body - Type your message body; you can only type 160 characters. At the bottom of the screen
you’ll see a counter that keeps track of how many characters you’ve typed. Some special characters on the
keyboard cannot be used in a text message; these include brackets ([]), braces ({}), tildes (~), and carets
(^). If you happen to type one of the “illegal” characters, no entry will be made in the message body. A
sample message is shown below:
3
To send your message, do one of the following:
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
112
Phone Messaging
• From the Compose screen, press Menu
• Press Back
4
then select Send [
+ M].
; a dialog box appears asking you to select Discard or Send. Select Send
.
To discard your message, either:
• From the Compose screen, press Menu
• Press Back
then select Discard.
; a dialog box appears asking you to select Discard or Send. Select Discard.
Reply to a Text Message
To reply to a text message, do the following:
1
From the Browse Messages screen, scroll to highlight the message you want to reply to. Open the message if
you wish by pressing the wheel.
2
From either the Read or Browse Messages screen, press Menu
3
The Reply screen opens with the To field filled in.
4
Complete and send your message, as described in Compose a New Text Message on page 112.
then select Reply... [
+ R].
Forward a Text Message
To forward a text message to another individual, do the following:
1
From the Browse Messages screen, scroll to highlight the message you want to forward. Open the message if
you wish by pressing the wheel.
2
From either the Read or Browse Messages screen, press Menu
3
The Forward screen opens ready for you to address. The message is appended to the end of the new
message.
4
Complete and send your message, as described in Compose a New Text Message on page 112.
then select Forward... [
+ J].
Resend a Text Message
You can only resend messages that are in the Sent folder. You can resend any of the messages in the Sent folder,
whether or not they were successfully sent:
1
From the Browse Messages screen, scroll to highlight the Sent message you want to resend. Open the
message if you wish by pressing the wheel.
2
Press Menu
then select Resend. Your message opens in a Compose screen, which means you can edit
any of the fields, if you wish.
3
When ready to resend, select Send [
+ M].
Add Text Message Senders to the Address Book
If you receive a message from an individual you would like to include as a contact in your Address Book, do the
following:
1
From the Browse Messages screen, scroll to highlight the message whose sender you want to add as a
contact. Open the message if you wish by pressing the wheel.
2
From either the Read or Browse Messages screen, press Menu
[ + @].
April 15, 2003
then select Add Contact...
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
113
Phone Messaging
3
The Add Contact to Address Book dialog box opens with the new contact’s phone number added:
4
At this point you can:
• Add the new contact without any other information by pressing Back
.
• Provide more contact information by filling in the fields in the dialog box.
• Simply select Cancel to return to the Phone Messages application without saving any of the new contact’s
information.
Read more about editing contact information in the Address Book application in 11. Keeping Contacts in the
Address Book on page 116.
Call Back Sender of a Message
To use the Phone application to call the sender of an SMS message, do the following:
1
From the Browse Messages screen, scroll to highlight the message from the person you wish to call back.
Open the message if you wish by pressing the wheel.
2
Press Menu
Send Call.
then select Call Back [
+ P]. You enter the Phone application; verify the number and press
Discard Messages
To discard a message:
1
From the Browse Messages screen, scroll to highlight the message you want to discard. Open the message if
you wish by pressing the wheel.
2
From either the Read or Browse Messages screen, press Menu
3
The message is moved to the Trash folder.
then select Discard [
].
To empty all messages from the Trash, from the Browse Messages screen, press Menu
then select
Empty Trash. The contents of your Trash folder are emptied after you confirm that you want to permanently
discard them.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
114
Phone Messaging
Retrieve Messages from the Trash
As long as a message is in the Trash, you can retrieve it to another folder:
1
From the Browse Messages screen, scroll to highlight the Trash folder.
2
Press the whweel to expand the contents of the folder (if they are not already expanded).
3
Scroll to highlight the message you want to retrieve.
4
Press Menu
discarded it.
then select Retrieve Message. The message now is restored to the folder from which you
Setting Phone Messages Ringtones
You can select the way your device lets you know (or “notifies” you) when a new text message has arrived. If
you have a ringtone selected, you will also receive a balloon notification in the title bar when a new message
arrives. To select a notification method, do the following:
1
From the Browse Messages screen, press Menu
2
The Ring when new message arrives check box is selected by default. If you would rather not be notified
by a ringtone when a new message arrives, remove the check mark by using the wheel to highlight the check
box, then press. (Pressing again will cause the check mark to appear once again.)
3
Assuming you do want a ringtone to notify you of a new text message, select a ringtone “category” from the
first pop-up menu. To open the category pop-up menu, use the wheel to highlight the first field (in the
example above, “Beeps” is selected in the first field). Then press the wheel to open the pop-up menu. Rotate
the wheel to select the category you want, then press. You can choose from Beeps, Silent, Tunes, and Voice.
4
Depending on what category you’ve selected, you will have additional sound selections (“songs”) in the popup menu to the right. You will hear a preview of the sound when you highlight it in the pop-up menu. Press
the wheel to select a song.
5
When finished setting up your ringtones, press Back
April 15, 2003
then select Settings. The Settings screen appears:
to save your changes.
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
115
Keeping Contacts in the Address Book
11. Keeping Contacts in the Address Book
Organize all the information that helps you keep track contacts in the Address Book. Read all about the Address
Book features in this chapter:
• Address Book Splash Screen on page 116
• How Much Information Can I Store? on page
117
• The Browse Contacts Screen on page 117
• T-Mobile Contact Information on page 117
• Keyboard Shortcuts on page 117
• Filter Contacts by Category on page 118
• Sort Contacts on page 119
•
•
•
•
•
•
Create a Contact on page 119
Edit a Contact on page 121
Discard/Retrieve a Contact on page 121
Contact a Contact on page 121
Find a Contact on page 122
How Much Information Can I Store? on page
117
• Empty the Address Book Trash on page 122
• Address Book Settings on page 123
Note! All the contacts you keep in the Address Book on the Web are kept in sync with the contacts on your
device. Read about using the Address Book on the Web (including how to import your existing Contacts lists) in
20. Using Address Book on the Web on page 182.
Address Book Splash Screen
To open the Address Book application, first press Jump, then scroll to highlight the Address Book icon in the lefthand “ring” of applications. You will see the Address Book “splash” screen on the right side of the screen when
you’ve highlighted the Address Book application icon:
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
116
Keeping Contacts in the Address Book
How Much Information Can I Store?
You can store 2000 contacts (on color devices) or 1000 contacts (on grayscale devices) in your
Address Book. For each contact you can keep these categories of information:
• Ten Phone numbers
• Five Email addresses
• Three Web addresses (URLs)
• Three Street addresses
• One Note
The Browse Contacts Screen
The Browse Contacts screen is the main view into your Address Book. On this screen, individual contacts are
listed, along with the first phone number that appears in the Phone section of their contact information:
You can specify to show “All” your contacts on this screen or just one category of contacts. Read more in Filter
Contacts by Category on page 118 and Sort Contacts on page 119.
T-Mobile Contact Information
Your device comes with T-Mobile Customer Care contact information already entered for you. To find this
information, do the following while you are in the Address Book:
1
On the Browse Contacts screen, scroll to the Customer Care entry; press the wheel to open the contact
details screen.
Tip: If you don’t see the Customer Care entry, open the menu and make sure either the All or Work category
is selected.
2
To phone T-Mobile Customer Care:
• From the contact details screen, scroll to highlight the phone number.
• Press Menu
then select Call.
Keyboard Shortcuts
While in the Address Book application, you can use the keyboard shortcuts shown in the tables below to open
options from the following menus:
• Browse Contacts Menu Shortcuts
• Contact Details Menu Shortcuts
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
117
Keeping Contacts in the Address Book
• Trash Menu Shortcuts
• Settings - Add Category and Add Label Menu Shortcuts
Browse Contacts Menu Shortcuts
New Contact...
+N
Discard
All
+0
Trash
+T
Contact Details Menu Shortcuts
Done
Discard Contact
Cancel
+.
Trash Menu Shortcuts
All
+0
Trash
+T
Settings - Add Category and Add Label Menu Shortcuts
Done
New Category...
+N
Discard
Filter Contacts by Category
To view only one category of contacts on the Browse Contacts screen, do the following:
1
From the Browse Contacts screen, press Menu
2
Scroll through the menu items until you find the list of categories. Individual categories are listed after All.
The category of contacts currently displaying on the Browse Contacts screen is indicated by a bullet:
3
Rotate the wheel to highlight the category you want to use to filter, then press. The Browse Contacts screen
refreshes to show only the contacts in the category you selected.
April 15, 2003
.
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
118
Keeping Contacts in the Address Book
Sort Contacts
On the Browse Contacts screen, individual contacts can be sorted by:
• First Name
• Last Name
In addition, you can specify the sort order:
• A to Z (ascending)
• Z to A (descending)
To specify your sort preference, do this:
1
From the Browse Contacts screen, press Menu
then select Sort... The Sort Options dialog box opens:
2
Highlight the Sort Options By field; press and hold the wheel to open the pop-up menu. Scroll to highlight
either the Last Name or First Name option; press to select.
3
Highlight the Sort order field; again, hold the wheel down to open the pop-up menu. Then scroll to highlight
either the A to Z or the Z to A order; press to select.
4
Select Done
when finished, or select Cancel to cancel any changes you’ve made to the sort options.
Create a Contact
You can add a contact to your Address Book by starting from scratch; or by duplicating an existing contact’s
information, then editing it. Both methods are described below.
Add a New Contact from Scratch
1
From the Browse Contacts screen, press Menu
Identity screen opens:
then select New Contact... [
+ N]. The New Contact
The Identity screen holds basic contact information, including a pop-up menu of icons you can assign to the
contact. Complete at least one of the fields, then select Done .
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
119
Keeping Contacts in the Address Book
2
The full contact screen appears:
From this screen you can:
• select the contact category (“Adventurers” in the example above)
• add phone numbers (up to ten)
• add email addresses (up to five)
• add Web addresses, or URLs (up to three)
• add a note
To add information, scroll the wheel to highlight the appropriate
button, and press. A screen opens in
which you can add the information. For example, the following illustration is of the Phone Number screen:
3
Add contact information to each screen, then select Done
have added all the information you wish.
. Continue through the Contacts screen until you
Note! Before you can save the contact information, you must have provided one of the following pieces of
information:
• First or Last name
• Phone Number
• Email address
• Company name
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
120
Keeping Contacts in the Address Book
4
To save all the pieces of information you’ve added to the contact screen, press Menu
[ ].
then select Done
Tip: If you cannot select Done from the menu because it is dimmed, then you must return to the contact
screen and add one of the required pieces of information listed above.
Create a New Contact by Duplicating an Existing Contact
1
From the Browse Contacts screen, highlight the contact whose information you want to edit.
2
Press Menu
then select Duplicate Contact. A contact information screen opens with an exact copy of the
highlighted contact’s information.
Note! If you save this contact information, you will have two duplicate entries for this contact.
3
Edit the information for the new contact, then press Menu
and select Done [ ].
Edit a Contact
To edit an existing contact:
1
From the Browse Contacts screen, highlight the contact’s name then press the wheel. The contact’s
information appears for editing.
2
Edit information as you wish, then press Menu
and select Done [ ].
Discard/Retrieve a Contact
To remove an existing contact from your Address Book:
1
From the Browse Contacts screen, highlight the contact’s name.
2
Press Menu
3
The contact is moved to the Trash without a confirmation prompt.
then select Discard Contact [
].
To retrieve a discarded contact:
1
From the Browse Contacts screen, press Menu
appear.
then select Trash [
+ T]. The contacts in the Trash
2
Highlight the contact you wish to retrieve from the Trash.
3
Press Menu
then select Retrieve Contact [ + R]. The contact information is moved back to your
Address Book in the category to which it was previously assigned.
Contact a Contact
Using stored contact information, you can quickly communicate with a contact by phone, Phone Messages,
Email, or Instant Messaging:
1
From the Browse Contacts screen, highlight the name of the contact with whom you wish to communicate.
2
Press the wheel to open the contact information.
3
Scroll to highlight the phone number, email address, or Web address you wish to use.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
121
Keeping Contacts in the Address Book
4
Press and hold the wheel to open the pop-up menu. Scroll to highlight one of the following, then press to
initiate the highlighted action:
• <Label><phone number> - to switch to the Phone application and place a call to your contact
• Email <address> - to switch to Email and compose an email to that contact
• Send Phone Message <phone number> - to switch to the Phone Messages application and compose a
text message to send to that contact
• Go to <URL>- to switch to the Web Browser application and open the contact’s Web page
• Look up <address> - to switch to the Web Browser application and open a map to the address
• Edit - to edit the highlighted contact information
• Discard - to discard the highlighted contact (and their information) to your Address Book Trash
You can also use menu items to perform these actions, assuming you have the relevant contact information
highlighted when opening the menu.
Find a Contact
If you have a large number of contacts in your Address Book, you can easily search and find a specific contact by
using the Match dialog box. The Match search is limited to the category of contacts you are currently viewing in
the Browse Contacts screen. So, if you want to search your entire Address Book, make sure you have selected
the All category from the menu. In the example below, the category being searched is Friends.
1
From the Browse Contacts screen (in any filtered view), press Menu
box opens.
then select Match... The Match dialog
2
Start typing the first letter(s) of the contact you wish to find. The nearest match is highlighted:
3
Either continue typing the name to narrow the search, or scroll to find your contact.
4
Press the wheel to open the contact details.
Empty the Address Book Trash
All discarded contacts are moved to the Trash category. Since this information takes up storage space on your
device, you should periodically remove items from Trash by doing the following:
1
From the Browse Contacts screen, press Menu
2
Press Menu
April 15, 2003
then select Trash. The contacts in the Trash appear.
then select Empty Trash. All contacts in the Trash are permanently removed.
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
122
Keeping Contacts in the Address Book
Address Book Settings
Use the Settings screen (shown below) to set up “categories” for organizing contacts, as well as “labels” for
identifying types of contact information. “Ski Friends” is an example of a contact category, and “Cabin #” is an
example of an information label. You can also import contacts from your SIM card. Read below for details.
Create, Edit, and Delete Categories
Each contact in your Address Book contacts is stored in a category. By default, your Address Book contains four
categories:
• Work
• Family
• Friends
You can edit the names of these categories, delete them, and create new ones, up to ten total.
To edit an existing category:
1
From the Browse Contacts screen, press Menu
2
Scroll down and select Categories. The Categories screen appears:
then select Settings. The Settings screen appears.
3
Scroll to highlight the category you wish to edit, then press the wheel. The Edit Category dialog box appears:
4
Edit the name as you wish, then select Done
to save the change. To cancel your edit, select Cancel.
To create a new category:
1
From the Browse Contacts screen, press Menu
April 15, 2003
then select Settings. The Settings screen appears.
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
123
Keeping Contacts in the Address Book
2
Scroll down and select Categories. The Categories screen appears.
3
Press Menu
4
Type the name of your new category. Remember, categories describe a group of contacts; for example, you
might have a number of medical doctors you want to group into a category named “MDs”.
5
Select Done
to save the category. If you change your mind and don’t want to create the new category
after all, select Cancel.
6
You will now be able to assign contacts to this new category, as well as use it to filter (sort) messages. Read
more in Filter Contacts by Category on page 118.
then select New Category [
+ N]. The New Category dialog box appears:
To discard a category:
1
From the Browse Contacts screen, press Menu
2
Scroll down and select Categories. The Categories screen appears.
3
Scroll to highlight the category you wish to discard.
4
Press Menu
5
A confirmation dialog appears, asking if you want to discard the category permanently. Select Discard if you
want to; otherwise, select Cancel.
then select Discard... [
then select Settings. The Settings screen appears.
].
Create, Edit, and Delete Labels
All pieces of information you store about an individual contact are described using “labels”. For example, in the
screen below, in the Phone section, “Home” and “Vacation” are labels used to differentiate Gloria’s home phone
number from the phone number she uses when on vacation.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
124
Keeping Contacts in the Address Book
By default, the Address Book includes the following labels:
• Home
• Work
• Mobile
• Fax
• Personal
You can edit the names of these labels, delete them, and create new ones, up to ten total.
To edit an existing label:
1
From the Browse Contacts screen, press Menu
2
Scroll down and select Labels. The Labels screen appears.
then select Settings. The Settings screen appears.
3
Scroll to highlight the label you wish to edit, then press. The Edit Label dialog box appears:
4
Edit the name as you wish, then select Done
to save the change. To cancel your edit, select Cancel.
To add a label:
1
From the Browse Contacts screen, press Menu
2
Scroll down and select Labels. The Labels screen appears, showing all existing labels:
3
Press Menu
then select New Label [
then select Settings. The Settings screen appears.
+ N]. The New Label dialog box appears:
Type your new label name. Remember, labels describe bits of information about an individual contact; for
example, you could create a label named “Social” to describe the email addresses your friends use for socialtype email. Each friend could also have an email address labeled “Work”.
4
Select Done
to save the label. If you change your mind and don’t want to create the new label after all,
select Cancel.
5
You will now be able to assign contact information to this new label, as well as view it on the Browse
Contacts screen describing the contact information displayed.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
125
Keeping Contacts in the Address Book
To discard a label:
1
From the Browse Contacts screen, press Menu
2
Scroll down and select Labels. The Labels screen appears.
3
Scroll to highlight the label you wish to discard.
4
Press Menu
5
A confirmation dialog appears, asking if you’re sure you want to discard the label. Select Discard if you want
to; otherwise, select Cancel to keep the label.
then select Discard... [
then select Settings. The Settings screen appears.
].
Import Contacts from SIM
From the Settings screen you can import to your Address Book any contacts you may have stored on a SIM card
from another T-Mobile GSM-enabled phone. Follow the instructions below to do this:
1
Follow the instructions provided in How to Remove Your SIM on page 28 to remove your T-Mobile-supplied
SIM from your device.
2
Follow the instructions in How to Insert Your SIM on page 28 to insert the SIM containing the contacts you
want to import.
3
From the Browse Contacts screen, press Menu
4
Scroll to highlight the Import Contacts from SIM button then press the wheel:
then select Settings. The Settings screen appears.
• If your SIM card contains no contact information, a dialog box will tell you that “No contacts were found on
the SIM card.”
• If your SIM card does contain contact information, a dialog box will appear, giving you status as the import
progresses. When the import has finished, you’ll be notified how many contacts were imported.
Note! If you import a contact already present in your Address Book, that contact will appear twice.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
126
Scheduling Events with Calendar
12. Scheduling Events with Calendar
We hope you enjoy using the Calendar application! For info on using the Calendar, read the topics in this
chapter:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Calendar Splash Screen on page 127
Keyboard Shortcuts on page 128
Create an Event on page 128
Move an Event on page 131
Edit an Event on page 132
Discard an Event on page 132
Ways to View Your Events on page 132
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Upcoming View on page 134
Day View on page 135
Week View on page 136
Month View on page 137
Year View on page 138
Trash View on page 138
Go To a Specific Day on page 139
Calendar Splash Screen
To open the Calendar application, first press Jump, then scroll to highlight the Calendar icon in the left-hand
“ring” of applications. You will see the Calendar “splash” screen on the right side of the screen when you’ve
highlighted the Calendar application icon:
The splash screen shows the events you’ve scheduled for the current day, with the event coming up soonest at
the top of the list.
What’s an Event?
An event is anything you want to schedule on your Calendar. An event can be a doctor’s appointment, a birthday
or anniversary, a tennis game with a friend, a dinner date, anything you want to schedule. If you want, your
device can remind you of an event by vibrating, flashing, or playing a ringtone. You can also set an event to
repeat automatically, like someone’s birthday once a year.
To get going immediately, follow the instructions in Create an Event on page 128.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
127
Scheduling Events with Calendar
Keyboard Shortcuts
While you’re in the Calendar application, you can use the following shortcuts for menu items:
New Event...
+N
Discard Event
Show Today
+H
Go To...
+O
View...
+D
Upcoming View
+0
Day View
+1
Week View
+2
Month View
+3
Year View
+4
Trash
+T
Next/Previous
Next/Previous
Next/Previous
Next/Previous
Day
Week
Month
Year
Create an Event
When you want to add an event to your schedule you can either:
• Add an Event from Scratch on page 128, or
• Copy an Existing Event on page 131
The two methods are described below in detail. Be patient! You have many options when setting up events, so
these instructions are rather long and complicated. But then, so is your schedule!
Add an Event from Scratch
1
From any Calendar view, press Menu
2
Start by giving the Event a title. The shorter the title, the more likely it will display on some of the tighter
views, like the Week view. If you don’t give it a title, the system will name it “Untitled”.
April 15, 2003
then select New Event [
+ N]. A blank New Event screen appears:
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
128
Scheduling Events with Calendar
3
Select an icon for your event by rotating the wheel to highlight the Icon selector:
.
Press the wheel to open the icon pop-up menu. Rotate the wheel to highlight an icon, then press to select it.
You can pick from the following icons:
4
Pick the Date on which the event starts from the date selector
. Highlight the month
selector with the wheel, then press to open the month selector pop-up. Rotate the wheel until the month you
want is highlighted, and press to select it. Rotate the wheel down one click to advance to the date selector,
use the wheel to open the pop-up and select a date, and so on through the year selector.
You can also use the calendar date selector to select the event start date. Highlight the calendar icon
then press. The current month appears, with today’s date highlighted:
If you want another day, month, or year, rotate the wheel (or press the D-pad arrows) until you highlight the
day in the month and year you want. Then press the wheel to have this date appear in the Event Details
screen.
5
Set the duration of the event in the Start & End section of the screen:
Select Start & End to open the pop-up menu:
Scroll the wheel to highlight the duration type you want, then press.
• If you selected Start & End, you’ll have to pick a date range:
• If you selected Start & Duration, you’ll pick a start time and duration in either hours or minutes:
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
129
Scheduling Events with Calendar
• If you selected All Day, you’ll need to pick how many days:
6
To make the event repeat on a regular interval, in the Repetition section, rotate the wheel to highlight the
Add button, then press. The Repetition dialog box opens:
Select a repeat interval from these choices:
• Every Day
• Every Sunday
• 1st Day of Every Month
• 1st Sunday of Every Month
• Yearly on June 4th
• Other...
7
Depending on your choice, you’ll have to decide how long, how often, etc. If you selected Other..., the Other
Repetition Options dialog box will open. You can select from these repeat options:
• Repeat on a fixed interval - Pick the fixed interval details:
• Repeat on specific days - Select how often you want the event to repeat and then select the appropriate
days:
8
To set a reminder for the event (and each time it repeats), in the Reminder section, highlight the Add
button and press. The Reminder dialog box opens:
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
130
Scheduling Events with Calendar
You can set your reminder to happen a number of minute(s), hour(s), or day(s) before the event.
You are reminded by a device alert (sound and on-screen message). Depending on what you set for the
remind time, you’ll receive a reminder like the following before your event:
9
To can also add a note to your event. Simply highlight the Notes box and type. Your note can be any length.
10 Here’s an example of a filled-in event:
Copy an Existing Event
1
From an Upcoming, Day, or Week view, scroll to highlight the event you want to duplicate, then press the
wheel to open its Events Details screen.
2
Press Menu
then select Duplicate Event. The screen appears to remain unchanged; however, you are
really looking at a copy of the original event.
3
Make your edits on the Event Details screen to reflect the details of your new event.
4
When you’ve finished editing the screen, press Menu
then select Done
.
Move an Event
If you have an event that occurs within a one-day time frame and the time for that event changes, you can
adjust its time from either the Day or Week view:
1
From the Day or Week view, scroll to highlight the event you want to move.
2
Press Menu
3
Scroll the wheel to position the event at the new time.
4
Press the wheel to save the move.
April 15, 2003
then select Move Event.
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
131
Scheduling Events with Calendar
Edit an Event
You can always edit an existing event by doing the following while in the Calendar application:
1
From an Upcoming, Day, or Week view, scroll to highlight the event you want to edit, then press the wheel to
open its Events Details screen.
2
Make your edits on the Event Details screen as you wish. If you need to change a Repetition or Reminder,
simply highlight the repetition or reminder line, and press to open the appropriate dialog box for editing.
3
When you’ve finished editing the details, press Back
prompted to:
. If you’ve changed a repeating event, you’ll be
• Change this date
• Change this & future dates
• Change all dates
Select the appropriate action and select Save.
Discard an Event
You can always discard an existing event by doing the following while in the Calendar application:
1
From an Upcoming, Day, or Week view, scroll to highlight the event you want to discard.
2
Press Menu
3
The event is moved to the Trash view. If you’ve discarded a repeating event, you’ll be prompted to:
then select Discard Event [
].
• Discard this date
• Discard this & future dates
• Discard all dates
Select the appropriate action and press Save.
Ways to View Your Events
The Calendar application offers a number of convenient ways to view all your scheduled events. To go to a
particular view within Calendar, press Menu
then select View... A menu appears, listing your view choices:
Upcoming, Day, Week, Month, Year, or Trash.
A check mark always appears next to the view currently on your screen:
Notice that from anywhere in the Calendar application you can use the shortcuts shown above to switch views.
For example, to switch from Upcoming to Month view, simply press
+ 3.
To read more about each view, follow the link in the first column of the table below.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
132
Scheduling Events with Calendar
View
What you see in this view
What you can do from this view
Upcoming
View
A list of all scheduled events
for the next five days.
Navigate up/down the list by rotating the wheel up
or down, or by pressing the D-pad up/down arrows.
Edit an event’s details by highlighting the event, then
pressing the wheel.
Day View
Week View
A list of all scheduled events
(past and future), organized by
day. One-hour time slots are
shown down the left side of
the screen.
Navigate up/down the list by rotating the wheel, or
by pressing the D-pad up/down arrows.
Events are shown in shaded
boxes, with their titles and
time span (as space allows).
Edit an event’s details by highlighting the event, then
selecting the wheel.
A table showing the current
week. The days of the week,
starting with Sunday, are
shown as column headings
and one-hour time slots are
shown down the left side of
the screen.
Navigate up/down the list by rotating the wheel, or
by pressing the D-pad up/down arrows.
Events are grey boxes,
sometimes containing a partial
title (depending on space).
Month View
A table showing the current
month, with the current day
highlighted.
Use the menu to Go to Today, Next Day, or
Previous Day.
Navigate among days in the week by pressing the Dpad left/right arrows. You can scroll to previous or
future weeks by continuing to use the arrow keys.
Use the menu to Go to Today, Next Week, or
Previous Week.
Edit an event’s details by highlighting the event, then
pressing the wheel.
Navigate between days by rotating the wheel.
Navigate between months by pressing the D-pad
left/right arrows.
Use the menu to Go to Today, Next Month, or
Previous Month.
Edit an event’s details by highlighting the event, then
pressing the wheel. The Day view appears. Press the
wheel again to edit the event’s details.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
133
Scheduling Events with Calendar
View
What you see in this view
What you can do from this view
Year View
A grid of the year, grouped by
month, with the current month
and day selected.
Navigate between months by rotating the wheel, or
by pressing the D-pad up/down arrows.
Use the menu to Go to Today, Next Year, or
Previous Year.
Navigate within a month by first highlighting the
month, then pressing the wheel. Now, with the
month highlighted, you can move around days by
rotating the wheel.
Open a specific Day view by first highlighting the
month, then pressing the wheel, then highlighting
the day and pressing. From there you can edit an
event’s details.
Upcoming View
The Upcoming view shows you all your events scheduled for the next five days.
To open the Upcoming Events view, from the Jump screen select Calendar, then press Menu
Views... > Upcoming [ + 0].
then select
Upcoming View Features
• In the Today section, you only see the events that have not expired, as of that minute.
• To open an Event Detail screen, use the wheel to highlight the event title, then press. At this point you can
edit the details if you want. To dismiss the screen and return to the view, press Back .
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
134
Scheduling Events with Calendar
• All-day events are shown with an event icon just to the left of the event name, like “Write Econ paper” in
the example above.
Upcoming View Navigation Tips
• Use the wheel to scroll through the five days, backward and forward. You are constrained in your scrolling
to the current day and four days forward.
Day View
The Day view shows you all the events you have scheduled for the current day, listed down the screen, starting
with the earliest event at the top.
To open the Day view, from the Jump screen select Calendar, then press Menu
Day [ + 1].
and select Views... >
Day View Features
• The full day will not display on your screen (not enough room), so the Day view always opens with the
events occurring at the current time centered on the screen.
• All-day events are shown at the top of the screen and will always stay in view, even when you scroll.
• If one or more events have overlapping times, the events will appear adjacent to each other, like the
“Night class - Econ” and “Write mom” events in the example above.
• Hours of the day are listed down the left edge of the screen. PM hours are shown against a dark
background; AM hours are shown against a light background.
Day View Navigation Tips
• Use the wheel to scroll up and down the day’s time slots.
• To go to the next or previous day’s view, instead of scrolling, you can always press Menu
Next Day [ ] or Previous Day [ ].
April 15, 2003
then select
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
135
Scheduling Events with Calendar
• But if you do keep scrolling up or down, you will enter the previous or next day’s time slots, and beyond.
Week View
The Week view shows you the events you’ve scheduled for the current week, with one exception: all-day events
are not shown in this view.
To open the Week view, from the Jump screen select Calendar, then press Menu
[ + 2].
and select Views... > Week
Week View Features
• The current day’s time slot lines are bold, like Jun 4 in the example above.
• An event you’ve highlighted is shown with a black background.
• Events in the past (“expired events”) are shown in blocks with a white background.
• If you have overlapping events, they will appear adjacent to each other.
• To open an Event Details screen, highlight the event, then press. View or edit the event details. To dismiss/
save your edits to the Event Details screen, press Back .
Week View Navigation Tips
• Use the wheel to scroll up and down through the time slots; use the D-pad left/right arrows to advance
back and forward through the days, even beyond the current week to the previous and next weeks.
• You can always use the menu to go to Next Week [
April 15, 2003
] or Previous Week [
].
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
136
Scheduling Events with Calendar
Month View
The Month view is designed to give you a sense of where you are in the month (the current day is highlighted in
black).
To open the Month view, from the Jump screen select Calendar, then press Menu
[ + 3].
and select Views... > Month
Month View Features
• The current day block is shown highlighted in black.
• If you have at least one event scheduled for a given day, that day contains a little square icon in the lowerright corner of the day block
.
• To drill down to an Event Details screen, highlight the day, then press to open the Day view. Make sure the
event you want to open is highlighted, then press again. View or edit the event details. To dismiss the
screen, press Back .
Month View Navigation Tips
• Use the wheel to scroll forward and backward through days.
• To scroll backward and forward through months, use the D-pad up/down arrows.
• You can always use the menu to go to Next Month [
April 15, 2003
] or Previous Month [
].
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
137
Scheduling Events with Calendar
Year View
The Year view opens to the current year and lets you look forward and backward across months in one glance.
This view is handy if you need to plan an event that is at least a month ahead, such as your summer vacation!
To open the Year view, from the Jump screen select Calendar, then press Menu
[ + 4].
and select Views... > Year
Year View Features
• The current month is shown highlighted in black.
• The current day is shown in a white circle.
• To drill down into a more focused view, first highlight the month you’re interested in, then press. Now you
can rotate the wheel to highlight a specific day. Once you’ve highlighted the day you want, press the
wheel. The Day view opens to your selected date. (From there you can view events.)
Year View Navigation Tips
• Use the wheel or D-pad up/down arrows to scroll from month to month.
• To move forward and backward among years, press Menu
Previous Year [
].
and select either Next Year [
] or
Trash View
Whenever you discard an event by using the menu option or the DEL key [
Trash, in case you want to retrieve it.
], your event is “saved” in the
To retrieve an event:
1
From your current view, press Menu
2
Scroll to highlight the event you want to retrieve.
3
Press Menu
April 15, 2003
then select View... > Trash [
+ T]. The Trash view opens.
then select Retrieve Event. The event returns to its original time slot.
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
138
Scheduling Events with Calendar
To empty the Calendar Trash:
1
From your current view, press Menu
opens.
then select and select View... > Trash [
+ T]. The Trash view
2
Press Menu
then select Empty Trash. After confirming your intent to discard your events permanently, a
message appears on the screen stating “The Trash is empty.”
Go To a Specific Day
Regardless of where you are in a particular view, you can always return to the current day (“today”) by pressing
Menu
then selecting Go to Today [ + H]. Your view remains the same, but the current day is highlighted.
If you want to go to a particular day:
1
From your current view, press Menu
which you can select a date to view.
2
Select Done and your current view jumps to highlight the day you specified.
April 15, 2003
then select Go To... [
+ D]. The Go to Date dialog box opens, from
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
139
Taking Photos
13. Taking Photos
Smile! You’re always ready to document a fun time with the Camera application. What’s more, you can instantly
involve family or friends by sending them the photo via email. You can save up to 36 pictures in your Gallery for
viewing either on your device or the Web.
Just put the camera into the headset/camera jack and you’re ready to start taking photos! Find out exactly how
to use your device’s camera by reading the topics in this chapter:
•
•
•
•
•
Camera Splash Screen on page 140
Keyboard Shortcuts on page 141
Insert the Camera on page 141
About Capture Modes on page 142
Take a Photo on page 142
•
•
•
•
•
View Your Photo Gallery on page 143
Email Photos on page 145
Change the Name of a Photo on page 145
Sort Photos on page 146
Discard Photos on page 146
Camera Splash Screen
To open the Camera application, first press Jump, then scroll to highlight the Camera icon in the left-hand “ring”
of applications. You will see the Camera “splash” screen on the right side of the screen when you’ve highlighted
the Camera application icon:
Two photos from your Gallery will display on the splash screen! You can store up to 36 photos in your Gallery.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
140
Taking Photos
Keyboard Shortcuts
You can use the following keyboard shortcuts for performing actions from the Camera menu:
Capture New
+N
View Full Screen/Thumbnails
+D
Rename Photo...
+E
Discard...
Mail Checked To...
+M
Insert the Camera
Here’s how to attach the camera to your device:
1
Before you can insert the camera into your device, you must expose the camera’s “lead”, which is protected
by a plastic case. You can tell which end of the camera is the case because it has a hook for attaching to a
key chain or cord. To remove the case, hold the camera with both hands (one hand on each end) and twist
the case 90 degrees, then pull to expose the lead:
2
Insert the lead firmly into the device headset/camera jack:
Be sure to push the camera in all the way! You’ll know it’s in far enough when the wheel lights up.
3
As soon as you insert the camera into the jack (assuming you’re already in the Camera application), your
device will display the Capture screen.
4
Before you take your first photo, be sure to read the next section, About Capture Modes on page 142.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
141
Taking Photos
About Capture Modes
There are two “modes” you can be in when taking a picture:
Preview
After you capture an image, it is displayed on the screen. From this screen you can decide
to keep it, retry the shot, or rename it. The capture mode is set to Preview by default.
AutoSave
You can take many photos in a row, without being prompted to save or delete the picture.
Photos are saved to your device for later review in your Gallery.
Take a Photo
To capture a photo, the camera must first be inserted in the jack and you must be viewing the Capture screen. If
you’ve just inserted the camera, the Capture screen will open automatically; however, if you’ve been to another
screen after inserting the camera, you’ll need to return to the Capture screen:
1
From either the Capture or Gallery screen, press Menu
2
The Capture screen appears with the image currently in focus in the “viewfinder”:
3
then select Capture New.
You must now select a capture mode. (Read more in About Capture Modes on page 142.)
• By default, the Capture screen opens in Preview mode, indicated by this icon:
• If you’d rather capture in AutoSave mode, then rotate the wheel to highlight the Preview button, then
press the wheel to open the pop-up menu. Scroll to highlight AutoSave, then press the wheel.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
142
Taking Photos
4
Position the camera so the image you want to capture displays in the “viewfinder” on the Capture screen. If
the image is upside down, select the Flip button to turn it right-side up. You can also use the D-pad’s up and
down arrow keys to flip the picture. Note that you can rotate the camera 180 degrees, which means you can
take a picture of yourself!
5
When you’re ready to capture the image, select the “shutter” button
6
The screen lens “closes” first, then opens, displaying your captured photo:
7
If you want to give your photo a name (other than the default “Photo #”), scroll to highlight the name text
field, then edit the name as you wish. If you keep the photo, you can always rename it later from the Gallery.
8
Select either Retry or Keep It
.
.
• If you select Retry, the photo is permanently deleted.
• If you select Keep It, you’ll be able to view your photo from the Gallery.
View Your Photo Gallery
You can save up to 36 photos on your device (called your “Gallery”). You can view your Gallery in two ways:
• Thumbnail View - screen displays six photos at a time, rendered at 75% of original size
• Full Screen View - screen displays one photo at a time, rendered at 150% of original size
By default, your Gallery opens in Thumbnail view. To switch between views, press
+ D.
Thumbnail View
The Thumbnail view is illustrated below.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
143
Taking Photos
Use the wheel to scroll through your Gallery. Below the thumbnails you’ll see a handy Gallery navigation bar. You
can always see where you are in your sequence of photos since the highlighted image is outlined. You can also
see at a glance which images are selected by looking for the check mark indicator.
The number of photos you have remaining (out of the 36 you can save) is displayed in the title bar:
.
Full Screen View
To get a magnified look at any of your photos (twice as large as displayed in the Thumbnail view), highlight a
picture in the Thumbnail view, then from the menu select View Full Screen. The selected image appears on the
screen:
You get a Gallery navigation bar on the Full Screen view as well. An image is considered “highlighted” if it is
currently in full-view on the screen.
How to Select Photos
In order to perform an action on one or more photos, you must first select the photos. Note! You can select
photos in either Thumbnail or Full Screen view.
1
From the Gallery screen, scroll through the photos, highlighting the photo you wish to select.
2
Press the wheel to cause a check mark to appear in the lower-left corner of the image. The corners of the
selected image will be outlined as well:
3
Continue to scroll through your Gallery, highlighting an image, then pressing the wheel to select it, until
you’ve selected all the images you wish.
4
To select a series of contiguous photos, rotate the wheel to highlight the first photo in the series, then
press and hold the Shift key down while continuing to scroll through the Gallery. After the last image you
want in the series is highlighted, press the wheel and release the Shift key. To deselect the photos, repeat.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
144
Taking Photos
5
To select all the photos in your Gallery, highlight the first image in the Gallery, hold the Shift key down
while scrolling to the last picture you want in the series, then press. Note that this method also works for
selecting a subset of contiguous photos in the Gallery, as described above.
6
Your Gallery navigation bar shows you which images you’ve selected:
When Your Gallery Is Full
If your Gallery becomes full (36 pictures stored), the title bar will read “0 Photos Left” and you will receive a
notice if you try to take a photo:
If you want to take new photos, first discard some existing photos, as described in Discard Photos on page 146.
Email Photos
You can send through the email application any photos you’ve stored in your Gallery, from either the Thumbnail
or Full Screen view. Note! You can attach all the images in your Gallery if you want, up to 36.
1
From the Gallery screen, scroll through your photos. When you find a photo you want to email, highlight the
photo then press the wheel to select it.
2
Continue to select photos until you’ve selected all the images you want to send.
3
Review the Gallery navigation bar at the bottom of the screen to make sure you’ve selected only the images
you want to attach to your email message:
4
Press Menu
then select Mail Checked To... [
photos shown as attachments.
5
Complete the email, then select Send [
+ M]. A new email compose screen will appear, with your
+ M].
Change the Name of a Photo
You can always re-name photos you’ve stored in your Gallery, from either the Thumbnail or Full Screen view.
Note! A photo name can be no longer than 32 characters.
1
Scroll to highlight the photo you want to rename, the press the wheel to select it.
2
Press Menu
April 15, 2003
then select Rename Photo... [
+ E]. The Rename Photo dialog box opens:
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
145
Taking Photos
3
The text cursor is located at the end of the current name. Delete the old name and type your new image
name as you like.
4
Select Done
to save the change and dismiss the dialog box.
Sort Photos
You can sort the order in which your photos appear in your Gallery by doing the following while in the Camera
application:
1
From either the Thumbnail or Full Screen Gallery view, press Menu
dialog box opens:
then select Sort... The Sort Photos
By default, your photos are sorted by date & time, with the newest photos at the beginning of the Gallery.
2
If you want to change this default sort behavior, you can choose from:
• Date & Time
-
Newer photos at start
-
Older photos at start
• Photo Name
3
-
A .. Z
-
Z .. A
When finished, select Done
to save changes, or select Cancel to dismiss the dialog box with no changes.
Discard Photos
You can always delete photos you’ve stored in your Gallery, from either the Thumbnail or Full Screen view.
To discard one photo at a time:
1
Scroll to highlight the image you want to discard.
2
Press the wheel to select it.
3
Press Menu
4
Select Discard to delete the image from your Gallery. If you decide to keep the photo after all, then select
Cancel .
then select Discard...
. A confirmation dialog box appears.
To discard more than one photo at a time:
1
Use the multiple selection methods described in How to Select Photos on page 144.
2
Press Menu
3
Select Discard to delete the image from your Gallery. If you decide to keep the photos after all, then select
Cancel .
April 15, 2003
then select Discard Checked... A confirmation dialog box appears.
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
146
Keeping To Do Lists
14. Keeping To Do Lists
Make sure you never forget another thing to do! Keep yourself organized with the T-Mobile To Do application.
Get started now by reading the topics in this chapter:
• To Do Splash Screen on page 147
• Edit a Task on page 150
• Keyboard Shortcuts on page 148
• Mark a Task Completed on page 150
• The Browse Tasks Screen on page 148
• Task Views on page 151
• Task Details Screen on page 149
• Discard a Task on page 151
• Create a New Task on page 149
• Manage Your To Do Trash on page 151
To Do Splash Screen
To open the To Do application, first press Jump, then scroll to highlight the To Do icon in the left-hand “ring” of
applications. You will see the To Do “splash” screen on the right side of the screen when you’ve highlighted the
To Do application icon:
The splash screen lists seven of your tasks that are either overdue or due today. If you have more tasks, a note
at the bottom of the screen tells you how many more. You can store a total of 50 tasks, including the tasks that
you’ve discarded to the Trash.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
147
Keeping To Do Lists
Keyboard Shortcuts
Use the following keyboard shortcuts while you’re using the To Do application:
New Task
+N
Mark Completed
+K
Mark Incomplete
+K
Discard
All Tasks by Date
+0
Upcoming & Overdue
+9
Trash
+T
The Browse Tasks Screen
When you first open the To Do application from the Jump screen, you’ll see a list of all your tasks, similar to the
following:
Each upcoming task is shown in regular font face. Overdue tasks are shown in bold font and include the
(overdue) indicator. Opposite each task name is the due date, or Today, or Tomorrow (if applicable). Completed
tasks are shown with a check mark
and the font is slightly dimmed.
You can decide if you want to view overdue and upcoming tasks, or all tasks (listed by date). The list in the
example above shows all tasks, including those completed. Read more in Task Views on page 151.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
148
Keeping To Do Lists
Task Details Screen
For each task there is a details screen, which contains more information about the task than can fit in the Browse
Tasks screen. The details screens are editable, so when opened, you can change the information.
To open a task’s details, on the Browse Tasks screen use the wheel to highlight a task, then press. The details
screen opens. Here’s an example:
Create a New Task
Follow these steps to create a new To Do task while in the To Do application.
1
From the Browse Tasks screen, press Menu
opens:
then select New Task [
+ N]. A blank Task Details screen
2
In the Task field, type a title for your To Do. Your title can be up to 40 characters long.
3
Scroll to highlight to the Due pop-up menu, then press the wheel. Select one of:
• Never
• Today
• Tomorrow
• Other...
4
If you select Other..., the Task Due Date dialog box opens:
Pick the Date on which the task is due by using either the date selector or the calendar:
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
149
Keeping To Do Lists
• The month section of the date selector
is highlighted by default. Press the wheel to open
the selector pop-up, rotate the wheel until the month you want is highlighted (rotate up for months later in
the year; rotate down for months earlier), then press. Rotate the wheel until the day you want is
highlighted, then press again. Now pick the year by rotating the wheel until the year you want is
highlighted, then press.
• You can also use the Calendar date selector to select a task due date. Use the wheel to highlight the
calendar icon
, then press. The current month appears with today’s day highlighted by default:
Rotate the wheel to highlight the date you want, then press to select it. If you want to assign a date in a
future month, rotate the wheel to scroll through the days and months until you get to the date you want.
With the date highlighted, press the wheel to set this date in the Task Details screen.
When finished selecting a Task Due Date, press Done
. You are returned to the New Task screen.
5
You can also add a note to your task. Simply highlight the Notes box and type. Your note can be up to 250
characters (about the size of a medium-sized paragraph).
6
To save your new task, press Menu
screen.
then select Done
. Your new task appears in your Browse Tasks
Edit a Task
You can edit any of your tasks by opening the task’s detail screen:
1
From the Browse Tasks screen, use the wheel to highlight the task you want to edit, then press. The Task
Details screen opens.
2
You can change any of the fields, just as if you were creating the task from scratch. Note that you can mark
the task completed by using the wheel to select the Completed check box. You can also mark a completed
task as incomplete by selecting the Completed check box again to clear the box of the check.
3
You can discard the task altogether by pressing Menu
and selecting Discard
.
Tip: Your task is not deleted permanently; it’s discarded, which means it’s been moved to the Trash, where
you can retrieve it.
4
When finished with your edits, press Menu
then select Done . If you decide you don’t want to save the
edits you’ve just made to the task details, press Menu
then select Cancel [ + .].
Mark a Task Completed
If you’ve completed a task, make sure to mark it completed. That way you can choose to hide these tasks from
the Browse Tasks screen list of tasks (read more in Task Views on page 151).
To mark a task as completed, do this:
1
On the Browse Tasks screen, scroll to highlight the task you want to mark completed.
2
Press Menu
3
A check mark now appears in the box to the left of the task title.
April 15, 2003
then select Mark Completed [
+ K].
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
150
Keeping To Do Lists
4
If you change your mind about having completed a task, you can mark it as incomplete by highlighting the
task, pressing Menu
then selecting Mark Incomplete [ + K].
Tip: You can also mark a task as completed/incomplete from the Task Details screen. Read more in Edit a Task
on page 150.
Task Views
There are three task “views”. You select the view you want by pressing Menu
• All Tasks by Date [
+ 0]
• Upcoming & Overdue [
• Trash [
and selecting one of:
+ 9]
+ T] (contains all tasks you’ve discarded)
Your currently-selected view is indicated by a bullet on the menu. In the example below, All Tasks by Date is the
current view on the screen--notice the bullet:
Discard a Task
You can discard a task from the Browse Tasks screens or the Task Details screen.
• From the Browse Tasks screen, scroll to highlight the task you want to discard, then press Menu
select Discard
.
• From the Task Details screen, press Menu
then select Discard
and
.
Either way, the task is moved to the Trash, where you can retrieve it...until you empty the Trash.
Manage Your To Do Trash
All the tasks you’ve discarded will appear in the Trash view.
Retrieve a Task You’ve Previously Discarded
All tasks that you have discarded are stored in the Trash, just in case you want to retrieve them later:
1
From the Browse Tasks screen, press Menu
opens.
2
Scroll to highlight the task you want to retrieve.
3
Press Menu
4
The task disappears from the Browse Trashed Tasks screen and appears in the Browse Tasks screen.
April 15, 2003
then select Retrieve Task [
then select Trash [
+ T]. The Browse Trashed Tasks screen
+ R].
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
151
Keeping To Do Lists
Empty the To Do Trash
Remember that you can store 50 tasks, including the tasks you’ve sent to the Trash. If you’re running out of
available To Do tasks, empty your Trash:
1
From the Browse Tasks screen, press Menu
opens.
2
Press Menu
3
A confirmation dialog box opens, asking if you’re sure you want to permanently discard the tasks. Select
Empty Trash, or select Cancel
if you change your mind about permanently discarding your trashed tasks.
4
The Trash empties.
April 15, 2003
then select Trash [
+ T]. The Browse Trashed Tasks screen
then select Empty Trash.
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
152
Keeping Notes
15. Keeping Notes
Save all kinds of important information with the Notes application. Check or update your notes on either your
device or the Web. To learn about using the Notes application, read the topics in this chapter:
• Notes Splash Screen on page 153
• Keyboard Shortcuts on page 154
• View Your Notes on page 154
• Sort Your Notes on page 155
•
•
•
•
Add a Note on page 156
Edit a Note on page 156
Discard a Note on page 156
Manage Your Notes Trash on page 157
Notes Splash Screen
To open the Notes application, first press Jump, then scroll to highlight the Notes icon in the left-hand “ring” of
applications. You will see the Notes “splash” screen on the right side of the screen when you’ve highlighted the
Notes application icon:
The splash screen lists the first four of your notes, as they appear in alphabetical order. The total number of
notes you have is also shown (12 total in the example above). You can create and save up to 50 notes (on
color devices) or 20 notes (on grayscale devices), which includes the notes that you’ve discarded to the
Trash.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
153
Keeping Notes
Keyboard Shortcuts
While you’re in the Notes application, you can use the following shortcuts for menu items:
New Note
+N
Discard Note
All (view)
+0
Trash (view)
+T
View Your Notes
You can select from two different views of your notes:
• All notes
• Trashed notes
To select a view, open the menu and select either All [ + 0] or Trash [ + T]. The view of all your notes is
further explained below. Read more about the Trash view in Manage Your Notes Trash on page 157.
The Browse All Notes Screen
The Browse All Notes screen lists all your notes in the order your specify in the Sort Options dialog box (read
more in Sort Your Notes on page 155). By default, the notes are displayed folded. This means that only the first
line of the note is shown:
Note: The ellipsis (...) indicates there’s more to the note than what is shown in the folded view. Unfolding is
explained in the topic below.
Use the wheel to scroll through the notes. You’ll know you’ve highlighted a note when its border appears darker
than the notes around it:
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
154
Keeping Notes
Unfolding/Folding a Single Note
To unfold a single note, do the following while in the Notes application:
1
From the Browse Notes screen, scroll to highlight the note then press the wheel. The note expands, showing
the full text:
2
If your note is longer than the screen, use the wheel to scroll up/down the note contents. You can also use
the D-pad arrows to navigate within the text.
3
To fold your note again, press the wheel. The note folds, showing only the first line:
Unfolding/Folding All Your Notes
To unfold all your notes, do this while in the Notes application:
1
From the Browse All Notes screen, press Menu
2
Scroll up/down through the list of notes.
then select Unfold All.
3
At any time, if you want to fold a notes’ contents, first highlight the note, then press the wheel. The contents
of the note collapse, but the note is still highlighted.
4
To re-fold all your notes, press Menu
and select Fold All. All the notes’ contents collapse. The note that
was highlighted when you folded all the notes remains highlighted.
Sort Your Notes
In the Browse All Notes view, you can specify the order in which your notes are displayed. By default, notes are
sorted alphabetically, A-Z, but you can change that by doing the following while in the Notes application:
1
From the Browse All Notes screen, press Menu
then select Sort... The Sort Options dialog box opens:
2
Use the wheel to highlight the Sort Notes pop-up menu, then press. The pop-up menu reveals three
choices:
• Alphabetically
• By Modification Date
• By Creation Date
3
Scroll to highlight your choice, then press the wheel to select it.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
155
Keeping Notes
4
Use the wheel to highlight the Sort Order pop-up menu, then press. This pop-up menu options depend on
what you’ve selected in the Sort Notes pop-up menu:
• Alphabetically
-
A to Z
-
Z to A
• By Modification Date and By Creation Date:
-
New to Old
-
Old to New
5
Scroll to highlight your choice, then press the wheel to select it.
6
Select Done
to save your sort options.
Add a Note
Before you add a note, here’s some note facts you need to know:
• How many notes can I have? You can store a total of 50 notes (on color devices) or 20 notes (on
grayscale devices), including the notes that you’ve discarded to the Trash. If you’ve run out of room, you
may want to empty your Trash (read more in Manage Your Notes Trash on page 157).
• How long can each note be? Each note can be 8000 characters (on color devices) or 1000 characters
(on grayscale devices) at most, and that includes spaces and line returns.
To create a new note, follow these steps while in the Notes application:
1
From the Browse All Notes screen, press Menu
2
A blank note opens. Type your note using the keyboard. (Read more in Typing and Navigating in Text Fields
on page 26.) Anything you type over 8000 characters (on color devices) or 1000 characters (on grayscale
devices) will not be saved with the note.
then select New Note [
3
Your note is saved as you type it. When you’re done, it is added (in the proper sort order) to your notes in the
Browse All Notes screen.
+ N].
Edit a Note
You can always edit an existing, unfolded note by doing the following while in the Notes application:
1
On the Browse All Notes screen, make sure you are viewing the note unfolded. If it’s folded, highlight the
note with the wheel, then press to unfold it.
2
The text cursor will be positioned at the spot where you last were typing in the note. Use the D-pad to move
within the text; use the keyboard to edit your note. (Read more in Typing and Navigating in Text Fields on
page 26.)
3
Your edits are saved as soon as you make them.
Discard a Note
Discarding a note means moving it to the Trash:
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
156
Keeping Notes
1
From the Browse All Notes screen, highlight the note you wish to discard. (It doesn’t matter if the note is
folded or unfolded.)
2
Press Menu
3
The note moves to the Trash, where you can later retrieve it or delete it for good.
then select Discard Note
.
Manage Your Notes Trash
All your notes are displayed either in the Browse All Notes screen or the Browse Trashed Notes screen, shown
below:
To switch from viewing all your notes to just the notes in your Trash, press Menu
The Browse Trashed Notes screen appears. From this screen you can either:
and select Trash [
+ T].
• Retrieve a Note You’ve Previously Discarded, or
• Empty Your Notes Trash
Retrieve a Note You’ve Previously Discarded
All notes that you have discarded are stored in the Trash, just in case you want to retrieve them later:
1
From the Browse All Notes screen, press Menu
screen opens.
then select Trash [
2
Scroll to highlight the note you want to retrieve.
3
Press Menu
4
The note now appears in the Browse All Notes screen.
+ T]. The Browse Trashed Notes
then select Retrieve Note.
Empty Your Notes Trash
Remember that you can store 50 notes (on color devices) or 20 notes (on grayscale devices), including the notes
you’ve sent to the Trash. If you’re running out of available notes, empty your Trash:
1
From the Browse All Notes screen, press Menu
screen opens.
2
Press Menu
3
A confirmation dialog box opens, asking if you’re sure you want to permanently discard the notes. Select
Empty Trash (or select Cancel
if you change your mind about permanently discarding your trashed
notes).
4
The Browse Trashed Notes screen appears with the message “The Trash is empty.”
April 15, 2003
then select Trash [
+ T]. The Browse Trashed Notes
then select Empty Trash.
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
157
16. Playing Rock & Rocket
When you have a minute, try the exciting Rock & Rocket game! Dispatch those rocks before they smash your
rocket to smithereens!
• Rock & Rocket Splash Screen on page 158
• The Object on page 158
• What Happens on page 159
• Scoring on page 159
• Hints on page 159
• Controls on page 159
Rock & Rocket Splash Screen
To open the Rock & Rocket game, first press Jump, then scroll to highlight the Rock & Rocket icon in the lefthand “ring” of applications. You will see the Rock & Rocket “splash” screen on the right side of the screen when
you’ve highlighted the Rock & Rocket application icon:
The Object
Destroy as many rocks as you can before running out of rocket ships.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
158
What Happens
You start each game with four rockets (
+
) and four hits (
). Each time you’re hit by either a small,
medium, or large-sized rock, you take a hit. After taking four hits, your rocket is destroyed and another rocket
appears (assuming you have any left). If you get too close to a rock, your shield activates and it costs you a hit.
The wheel will change color from clear to yellow to red as you take hits. The good news is you have unlimited
ammunition!
You can also be hit by the Alien Antagonist
! If you hit an Antagonist, cover your eyes or you’ll be subject
to an alien oath. Very bad! Also (minor detail), if you’re hit by the Alien Antagonist, you die baby.
Scoring
Each time you make a hit, you’ll score:
Alien - 25 points
Large rocks - 50 points
Medium rocks - 100 points
Small rocks - 150 points
For every 15,000 points (in any one game) you’ll earn another rocket, up to six at any one time. As you get more
points, the soundtrack tension builds!
Your high score is saved on the service and always displays on the Rock & Rocket preview and start screens.
Hints
The Antagonist Alien likes to lure you into rock fields. Beware. Also, if you hit a big rock, it breaks into a smaller
rocks. You can only completely eradicate the smallest rocks.
Controls
To make this happen...
Do this...
Turn rocket
Rotate wheel
Fire
Press wheel (press and hold to fire at
regular intervals)
Thrust rocket forward
Press Jump button
Pause game
Press Back button
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
159
17. Playing UI Evolution Arcade Games
Take a break and play some games from UI Evolution! You’ll find these games in the Arcade:
•
•
Arcade Splash Screen on page 160
Bubbles on page 161
•
•
•
Code Monkey on page 162
Shuffle on page 163
Lab Ratz on page 164
Arcade Splash Screen
To find the Arcade, scroll through the applications on the Jump screen until you see the Arcade splash screen:
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
160
Bubbles
Burst those bubbles before they fill the tank!!
The Object
The object of Bubbles is to pop all the bubbles before they fill the tank (the tank is full when at least one string
of bubbles goes from the bottom to top of tank). Bubbles pop only when they completely fill a row (any row, not
just the top row).
What Happens
Bubbles rise from the bottom center of the tank in four-bubble formations, like this one:
. As each formation
rises, you can rotate the formation to fit the blanks in the row at the top of the tank. You can also shift the
formation to the left or right. Once you fill a row with bubbles, the bubbles pop and disappear.
Scoring
Each time you pop a row of bubbles, you get 100 points.
Hints
Watch the box on the right called Next to see what bubble formation will be rising next. By knowing the next
formation, you can better strategize where to put the bubble currently rising.
Controls
To make this happen...
Do this...
Move bubble formation left
Rotate the wheel up, or
Press left D-pad arrow
Move bubble formation right
Rotate the wheel down, or
Press right D-pad arrow
Rotate bubble formation
Press wheel or Return key
Send bubble formation straight up
Press spacebar
Pause game
Press Back button
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
161
Code Monkey
Can you crack the Monkey Code?
The Object
The Code Monkey has created a hidden Monkey Code. The object of Code Monkey is to guess the combination of
monkey faces, bananas, and monkey wrenches in as few guesses as possible.
What Happens
The Code Monkey has placed four random items in the Monkey Code, choosing from four monkey faces, a
banana, and a monkey wrench:
Use the wheel or D-pad arrows to cycle through the options, then press the wheel or Return key to enter your
guess.
The Code Monkey won’t divulge the Monkey Code unless you guess it right. But the Code Monkey will give you
feedback on your guesses: A smiley face means you’ve got the right face/banana/wrench in the right spot. A
frowny face means you’ve got the right face/banana/wrench in the wrong spot. And no face means wrong face/
banana/monkey entirely. The tricky part is figuring out which feedback face matches which monkey/banana/
wrench. You win when you get four smiley faces.
For example, let’s say the Monkey Code is banana/banana/wrench/wrench, and you guess monkey1/monkey2/
banana/wrench:
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
162
The Code Monkey feedback at the bottom is one smiley face and one frowny face. The smiley face refers to the
wrench, which is the right item in the right place (fourth). The frowny face refers to the banana, which is the
right item in the wrong place. (The Code Monkey has it in the first two spots, and you guessed third.)
Scoring
If you’re quick with a banana, you’ll crack the Monkey Code in five moves or fewer. But sometimes even the most
seasoned banana cryptologists can’t outsmart the Code Monkey.
Hints
Use logic to solve the Monkey Code. Try starting your guesses with only one monkey face.
Controls
To make this happen...
Do this...
Choose a guess
Rotate the wheel up/down, or
Press up/down D-pad arrow
Enter your guess
Press wheel or Return key
Move selector up/down
Press D-pad left/right arrow
Pause game
Press Back button
Shuffle
Can you move that lone box around to line up a row or column of the same pattern?
The Object
The object of Shuffle is to make the big box disappear before the timer runs out.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
163
What Happens
Move that lone square around the larger box, then push it in to shove out another lone box on the opposite side.
Line up like colors or patterns in a row or column and that entire row or column will disappear. But hurry--the
timer is ticking!
Scoring
Gain bonus points by clearing a big box quickly, or by wiping away multiple rows with one push.
Hints
Sometimes it’s better to push a different box out the other side then to circle all the way around with the current
one.
Controls
To make this happen...
Do this...
Move square clockwise
Rotate the wheel down, or
Press down D-pad arrow
Move square counter-clockwise
Rotate the wheel up, or
Press up D-pad arrow
Insert square
Press wheel or Return key
Add more blocks
Press spacebar
Pause game
Press Back button
Lab Ratz
Don’t let the Lab Ratz escape!
The Object
The object of Lab Ratz is to guide the Lab Ratz through a tunnel from their cage on the left to their cage on the
right, using only the tunnel pieces that fall into your hands.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
164
What Happens
Someone left the Ratz’s cage door open, and they’ll need a tunnel built to get them from the left cage to the
right one. Tunnel pieces (up/down, left/right, 4-way, and 90-degree turns) fall in random order--you can see the
next piece at the upper right. The Ratz will escape onto the floor if the finished tunnel doesn’t connect them to
the cage on the right.
Use the D-pad to position the next piece on the grid. The white Ratz will escape when the timer runs out. Don’t
let them hit the floor or the game is over.
Scoring
For each tunnel piece that the Ratz move through, you’ll receive 100 points. The longer the tunnel, the more
points you earn!
Hints
Keep an eye on the upper right--the next piece to drop is the one on top. And the one after that is just below it.
And the one after that...
Don’t be afraid to plan ahead! And watch out for hungry cats!
Controls
To make this happen...
Do this...
Move pieces left, right, up, down
Press D-pad left, right, up, down arrows
Place a tunnel piece
Press the spacebar
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
165
The Desktop Interface
18. The Desktop Interface
You probably spend a lot of time in front of a computer. Perfect! The data you store in the Email, To Do,
Calendar, Address Book, Notes, and Camera applications are also available for viewing or editing on the Web
from any computer connected to the Internet. Read more in this chapter:
• Signing In To the Desktop Interface on
page 166
• Jump Page on page 167
• The T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual on
page 167
• More About the Applications on the Web on
page 168
• Signing Out on page 168
Signing In To the Desktop Interface
All the information you put on your device is also on the Web so you can look at it or even change it from your
computer. Where on the Web? Follow these instructions to sign in.
1
On your desktop or laptop computer, point your Web browser to www.t-mobile.com.
2
Click the link to My T-Mobile. The My T-Mobile page opens.
3
Type your device’s Phone Number and Password to sign in.
Tip: If you don’t know your phone number, you can find it on your device: From the Jump screen, open the
Phone application. Press the Menu button, then select Settings. Your phone number is shown at the top of
the screen that appears.
4
On the Web page that opens, click the link to Desktop Interface.
5
Your Jump page opens, displaying a summary of your emails, upcoming Calendar events, To Do list, and
Notes.
6
To make the Desktop Interface your default entry point to the T-Mobile Web site after signing in, click Set My
T-Mobile Start Page (this link appears in the upper-right corner of your Jump page). On the window that
opens, select Desktop Interface (Your Jump Page).
7
Use the navigation buttons at the top of the page to open the various applications, or to open the Help
window, which displays the online “T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual”.
Note that you can open the online Owner’s Manual directly by pointing your Web browser (including the Web
Browser on the device) to http://help.sidekick.dngr.com.
8
When you ’re finished using the Web applications, always click the Sign Out link to exit the Web site
securely.
The T-Mobile applications not available on the Web are Phone, Instant Messaging, and Web Browser. All the
other applications display the same personal data that you can see on your device screens. This is accomplished
through data synchronization, which means that no matter where you enter or receive personal information--on
the device or the Web interface--you’ll be able to open that information on both clients.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
166
The Desktop Interface
Jump Page
After you sign in, the page that opens is called your “Jump page” and contains the most up-to-date information
you have in the Email, Notes, To Do, and Calendar applications:
Like the “splash screens” on your device, the Jump page displays current information so you can quickly see if
you have received any new emails, what events are coming up on your Calendar, tasks that need taking care of,
and your notes.
The T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
This manual, the “T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual”, is available in two formats from the Help link on the Web
interface: HTML and Adobe Acrobat (PDF). Use the PDF file for printing the manual. To open the PDF file, simply
click the PDF link associated with the Owner’s Manual. The PDF file opens in the help window.
To print the entire manual or just a portion, click the printer icon in the Adobe menu bar:
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
167
The Desktop Interface
In the printer dialog box that opens, specify whether you want to print the entire manual or just a range of
pages.
More About the Applications on the Web
You can read details on using all the applications on the Web in these chapters:
19. Sending Email from the Web on page 169
20. Using Address Book on the Web on page 182
21. Using Calendar on the Web on page 194
22. Camera Gallery on the Web on page 205
23. Keeping a To Do List on the Web on page 208
24. Keeping Notes on the Web on page 212
25. Settings on the Web on page 215
Signing Out
For security’s sake, we recommend that you always click Sign Out when leaving the applications on the Web
interface:
This ensures that no one else can read your information!
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
168
Sending Email from the Web
19. Sending Email from the Web
All the email you receive on your device is also viewable on the desktop Web interface. Read about how to use
the Web Email application in this chapter:
•
•
•
•
•
Opening Email on the Web on page 170
Your Inbox on page 170
View Your Email on page 170
Send a New Message on page 172
Attach Photos and Files to a Message on
page 173
•
•
•
•
Web Email Settings on page 174
Accounts on page 178
Discard Email Messages on page 181
Collect Mail from POP3 Accounts on page
180
• Move Messages to Folders on page 180
Opening Email on the Web
Open your Jump page by following the instructions in Signing In To the Desktop Interface on page 166. Then
open the Email application by clicking
on the Jump Page button bar, or by clicking the Email icon in
the Email section of the Jump page. By default, your Inbox displays:
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
169
Sending Email from the Web
On the left side of the page you see the sidebar, which contains links to views into your email and actions you
can take on your email:
Each action and view is described in the sections that follow.
Your Inbox
When you open Email, your Inbox is displayed by default. All emails in the Inbox are listed in chronological order,
from most recent to oldest. For each email, the From, Subject, Date received, and Size are listed. In addition,
icons immediately to the left of the email tell you if you’ve replied to the email ( )or if the email has an
attachment ( ). Unread messages are listed in bold.
You can do the following from your Inbox:
• Sort your email by any of the column headings in either ascending or descending order.
• Open an individual message by clicking either the From or Subject of the message.
• Discard email by checking the box to the left of the email, then clicking Discard Checked.
• Move the email to a different folder by checking the box to the left of the email, then highlighting a folder
in the Move checked to box at the top or bottom of the page and clicking Go.
• Empty all the messages in the folder by clicking Empty Folder.
View Your Email
Sort Email
You can sort your email list by any of the column headings: From, Subject, Date, or Size. By default, emails are
sorted by date, in descending order, indicated by the down arrow next to the column heading:
.
To change the sort arrangement, simply click the heading name on which you want to sort the email. To reverse
the order to descending, simply click the heading name again. The arrow indicates whether the sort is ascending
(new messages at bottom ), or descending (new messages at top ).
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
170
Sending Email from the Web
Note: If you change the sort order from the default (descending by date), after you leave the Email application
and then return to it, the sort order will remain the way you last set it.
Read an Email
1
From your Inbox (or another folder), click either the From or Subject of the message.
You can also open an email directly from the Jump page by clicking the email’s From, Subject, or Date.
2
Once you’ve read your email, you can take any of the following actions:
• Reply to the message by clicking Reply or Reply All. This opens a New Message page, with the From and
To fields automatically filled in.
• Forward the message by clicking Forward. This opens a New Message page, with the forwarded message
included. If the forwarded message contained any attachments, you can remove those you don’t want to
include in the forwarded message by first checking the attachment and then clicking the Remove
Checked button.
• Discard the message by clicking Discard.
• Move the email to a different folder by highlighting a folder in the Move to box at the top or bottom of the
page and clicking Go.
• Add the sender to your address book by clicking Add Contacts after their email address in the From field.
• Proceed to your next message by clicking Next Message at the top of the page; or go to the previous
message by clicking Previous Message at the top of the page (these options will only appear if you have
a next or previous message).
3
To close the email and return to a folder, simply click the folder name in the Email sidebar.
Open an Attachment
You know an email has an attachment if there is a paper clip icon just to the left of the message ( ). All
attachments are listed as links and display below the message body. Click the link to open or save the
attachment.
Graphic attachments of the following formats are displayed under the message body:
• .gif
• .jpg, .jpeg
• .png
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
171
Sending Email from the Web
Send a New Message
1
Click the New Message link in the sidebar. The New Message page opens:
Note: If you are on the Jump page, you can open the New Message page directly by clicking New Message
in the Email section of the page.
2
Compose your message.
• From field – If you have set up POP3 accounts, then you can choose which address you want to use to
send the email from the drop-down list in this field.
• To field – Type in the email address of the person to whom you are sending the email.
• CC and BCC fields – Optional fields.
• Subject field – Type your subject line; it can be up to 256 characters long.
• Attach
Photos button – if you want to attach a photo from your Photo gallery to send as an
attachment to the email, click this button to open your photos. Check the box(es) for the photo(s) you
want to attach, then click Send Checked. You are returned to the Compose Message page, with the
selected photos now attached.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
172
Sending Email from the Web
• Browse and Attach File buttons - if you want to attach a file from your local desktop or laptop computer’s
hard drive, click the Browse button to open your local file selection dialog box. You can select up to 36
files (including photos), for no more than 3 MB. Click Attach once you’ve selected a file.
• Message body – Type your message; there are no limits to how long a message body can be.
• Signature – Edit or use the default signature. Signatures can be up to 256 characters and it is
recommended that you limit yourself to four lines. Set your default signature on the Accounts page, as
described in Device Account on page 178.
3
To send the message, click Send.
4
To save the message as a draft, click Save as Draft. You’ll be returned to your Inbox. You can click Drafts in
the sidebar at any time to complete and send the message, or discard it.
5
To discard the message, click Cancel. You’ll be returned to your Inbox.
Attach Photos and Files to a Message
You can attach up to 36 files (including photos) to each new email message, not to exceed 3 MB. (Note that
these limits do not apply to messages with attachments that you forward.) If you have selected the Email setting
to Save copies of outgoing messages in Sent folder, then your attachments will be saved with the copy of
your message.
Attach Gallery Photos to a Message
1
From the New Message page, just above the Message field, click Attach
2
Your Photo Gallery appears. Check each photo you want to attach. (Note: If you want to attach a digital
photo you’ve taken with a stand-alone camera, then follow the instructions in Attach Files to a Message on
page 174.)
3
When finished selecting, click Send Checked.
4
Your New Message page reappears, with the photo name(s) listed in the Attachments field.
5
If you want to select more Photos, click Attach
Photos to repeat the photo selection process. If you try
to add more files than the space and number limits allow, you’ll receive a message letting you know. Also, as
you add attachments, you’ll be able to see, just below the Attachments field, how much space they take up:
6
From the New Message page, if you want to remove any of the attached photos, check the photo name(s)
and then click Remove Checked.
7
When you’ve finished composing your message, click Send. If you change your mind and do not want to
send the message, click Cancel.
April 15, 2003
Photos button.
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
173
Sending Email from the Web
Attach Files to a Message
1
From the New Message page, just above the Message field, click Browse button.
2
A standard dialog box appears, allowing you to navigate your local file system and select a file to send. With
the file highlighted, select Open. The file name appears in the Browse box. Click Attach.
3
The filename(s) is now listed in the Attachments field in the New Message page and the total size of
attachments.
4
If you want to select more files to send, click Browse to repeat the file selection process. If you try to add
more files than the space and number limits allow, you’ll receive a message letting you know. Also, as you
add attachments, you’ll be able to see, just below the Attachments field, how much space they take up (see
illustration above).
5
From the New Message page, if you want to remove any of the attached files, check the filename(s) and then
click Remove Checked.
6
When you’ve finished composing your message, click Send. If you change your mind and do not want to
send the message, click Cancel.
Web Email Settings
There are three categories of email settings that you can configure for your Web account:
• Message Management – In this section you can specify whether or not you want a copy of sent mail
saved in your Sent folder, and select an option for managing your mailbox to avoid having incoming mail
bounced due to a full mailbox. Your mailbox limit is 6 MB.
• Attachments – In this section you specify which attachments you want downloaded with your emails.
This feature will help you manage your mailbox size.
• Folders – By default, the following 5 email folders are created for your Web email: Inbox, Trash, Saved,
Drafts, and Sent. These folders are not editable, but you can create up to 20 folders that you can then edit
or discard.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
174
Sending Email from the Web
Message Management
To control automatic saving of sent emails:
1
Click Settings and Folders in the Email sidebar. This opens the Settings page; the Message Management
tab is selected by default:
2
In the Sent Messages section, check the box if you want copies of your sent mail saved to your Sent folder
(the box is not checked by default).
If you do not want copies of your sent mail saved, clear the check box.
3
Click Save at the bottom of the page.
To manage your messages:
1
Click Settings and Folders in the Email sidebar.
2
Under the Message Management tab, in the TRASH MANAGEMENT section, check the Automatically
empty the Trash box if you want your Trash to be emptied automatically every night no matter how full your
mailbox is. This option is not checked by default.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
175
Sending Email from the Web
3
Under the Message Management tab, in the AUTOMATIC MESSAGE MANAGEMENT section, select one
of the following options:
• Never automatically discard messages. Selecting this option means that you will manually manage
your messages. This option is selected by default.
• Automatically discard messages older than 7 days. Selecting this option means that if there is no room
for an incoming message, messages older than seven days in all your folders (except Saved and Drafts
folders) will be automatically deleted (not moved to Trash first).
• Automatically discard messages of any age. Selecting this option means messages of any age will be
discarded to make room for new messages. “Read” messages are discarded before “unread” messages.
4
Click Save at the bottom of the page.
Attachments
You control the size and type of attachments that are downloaded with emails from this page:
Folders
You can create up to 20 folders, in addition to the 5 system folders (Inbox, Saved, Drafts, Sent, and Trash).
To add an email folder:
1
Click Settings and Folders in the Email sidebar to open the Settings page.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
176
Sending Email from the Web
2
Select the Folders tab. This opens the Folders page, where all current folders are listed, along with the
number of messages in each folder and the folder size.
3
To add a new folder, click Add Folder in the lower-right corner of the page. In the box provided, type the
name of the new folder. Be sure and read the guidelines for folder names listed on the page (spaces and
underscores are allowed, but punctuation is not).
4
Click Add the Folder. You’re returned to the Folders page, where the folder you just created is now added to
your list of folders.
To edit an existing email folder:
1
Click Settings and Folders in the Email sidebar to open the Settings page, then select the Folders tab.
2
The names of editable folders are displayed in editable text boxes. Make whatever changes you wish to the
folder names, then click Save Changes. To discard your edits, click Cancel.
To discard an email folder:
1
Click Settings and Folders in the Email sidebar to open the Settings page, then select the Folders tab.
2
Click Discard opposite the folder you want to delete. A warning page appears, informing you that all emails
in the folder will be deleted along with the folder.
3
To complete the discard, click Discard. You are returned to the Folders page; the discarded folder no longer
appears.
If you decide to keep the folder and the messages, click Cancel.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
177
Sending Email from the Web
Accounts
Click Accounts from the sidebar to open the Accounts page. From this page you can set up preferences for your
device email account, as well as add up to three POP email accounts:
Primary Account
If you have one or more POP accounts set up (as in the illustration above), then you specify your “primary”
account from this page. This will be the account that you send email from by default (you can always manually
change the From field in a new email message).
In the example above, the device email is the primary account since the option Send mail from your device
address by default is selected. To change your primary account to a your POP account, simply select the Send
mail from this address by default option for that account, then click Save.
Device Account
For your device account, you can edit the following information by clicking Edit Device Account.
• From address – the email address that want to appear in the From field on mail sent through this account
• From Name – your name as you want it to appear on mail sent through this account
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
178
Sending Email from the Web
• Reply-to address – the address to which replies will be sent
• Reply-to name – the name displayed for the reply-to address
• Signature – limit to 256 characters or less; four lines max recommended
POP Accounts
The Accounts screen is where you set up POP3 email accounts from which email can be retrieved. You can
specify up to three (3) POP3 accounts.
To add a POP3 account:
1
Click Accounts in the Email sidebar. This opens the Accounts page.
2
Click New POP Account in the lower-right corner of the page. The POP Account page opens:
3
Type your Login name in the box provided.
4
Type your email POP server name. If you do not know the server name, you can obtain this information from
the POP3 email service provider. Also, refer to Add a POP3 Account on page 99 for more information.
5
Fill in the email server Port; leave as 110 unless you know it is different.
6
Type your email password.
7
If you want the email to be removed from the POP3 server as it’s collected and sent to your device, check the
Remove mail from server as it’s collected box. By default, email retrieved from a POP3 server will remain
on the POP3 server.
8
Select the folder you want mail from this server to be delivered to; Inbox is selected by default.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
179
Sending Email from the Web
9
If you want mail collected from this account, leave the Collect mail from this account box checked. If you
don’t want mail collected, click the check box to clear it.
10 When the form is complete, click More Options.
11 Complete the signature and name information:
• From address – the email address that want to appear in the From field on mail sent through this account
• From Name – your name as you want it to appear on mail sent through this account
• Reply-to address – the address to which replies will be sent
• Reply-to name – the name displayed for the reply-to address
• Signature – limit to 256 characters or less; four lines max recommended
12 Click Save when the page is complete. You’re returned to the Accounts page, with the new POP3 accounted
listed.
13 Before your account is completely set up, the validity of the POP3 email account will be verified. If there is a
problem with the account information you provided, an error message will appear at the top of the POP3
accounts page. Click Edit this account to try to fix the error or to delete the account.
To edit a POP3 email account:
1
Click POP Accounts in the Email sidebar. This opens the POP Accounts page.
2
Click Edit this Account opposite the account you want to edit. Your account information appears in an
editable form.
3
Make edits as you wish, then click Save.
To delete a POP3 mail account:
1
Click Accounts in the Email sidebar. This opens the Accounts page.
2
Click Edit this Account opposite the account you want to discard. Your account information appears in an
editable form.
3
Click Discard.
Collect Mail from POP3 Accounts
To collect mail from any POP3 mail accounts you have set up:
1
Click Fetch POP Mail in the Email sidebar.
2
Email from your POP3 accounts is automatically collected and filed in the folder specified in the account setup
information.
Move Messages to Folders
You can move messages around within folders by doing the following:
1
Open the folder the email is currently in, then check the box opposite the email. You can check as many
messages as you wish.
2
Open the Move checked to list box in the upper or lower-right corner. All folders (except for the Drafts and
Sent folders, and the folder the email currently is in) are shown in the list.
3
Highlight the folder into which you want to move the message. Then click Go.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
180
Sending Email from the Web
Discard Email Messages
To discard an email message:
1
Open the folder where the email is located, then check the box opposite the email you want to discard. Open
the email if you wish.
2
Click Discard Message. The message is moved to the Trash folder.
3
To retrieve your discarded message, click Trash in the Email sidebar. Check the box opposite the email you
want to retrieve, then highlight a folder from the Move checked to box and click Go. This will move the
message back to the selected folder.
To empty all messages from a particular folder, select the folder in the sidebar, then click Empty Folder at
the top or bottom of the page.
To empty all messages from the Trash, click Empty Trash in the Email sidebar. You’ll be asked to confirm
your action since the messages will be permanently deleted. Click Empty Folder to proceed, or click Cancel to
return to the Trash folder.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
181
Using Address Book on the Web
20. Using Address Book on the Web
You’ll want to add all the people you know to your Address Book on the Web. From the Web you can not only
add and edit contact information, you can import contacts from other desktop applications. Read about how to
use Address Book on the Web in this chapter:
• Opening Address Book on the Web on page
182
• Browse Contacts on page 183
• How Many Contacts Can I Store? on page
183
• Browse Contacts Page on page 183
• Address Book Settings on page 184
• Add a Contact on page 188
•
•
•
•
Edit a Contact on page 190
Discard/Retrieve a Contact on page 191
Import Contacts on page 192
Communicate with a Contact on page
193
• Empty the Trash on page 193
Opening Address Book on the Web
First, open your Jump page by following the instructions in Signing In To the Desktop Interface on page 166.
Open your Address Book by clicking
on the Jump page button bar. By default, the Browse
Contacts view is displayed; all contacts are listed in alphabetical order, with their phone numbers and email
addresses:
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
182
Using Address Book on the Web
Your Web Address Book is always synchronized with the Address Book on your device.
Browse Contacts
The Browse Contacts page lists a view of your contacts on the right side of the page, as shown in the illustration
above.
On the left side of the page you see the sidebar, which includes links for New Contact, Browse Contacts (the
current selection), Trash, Empty Trash, Import, and Settings:
How Many Contacts Can I Store?
You can store 2000 contacts (on color devices) or 1000 contacts (on grayscale devices) in your
Address Book. For each contact you can keep these categories of information:
• Ten Phone numbers
• Five Email addresses
• Three Web addresses (URLs)
• Three Street addresses
• One Note
Browse Contacts Page
The Browse Contacts page contains a summary view of your contacts. You can set how you view these contacts
by specifying sort criteria and order, and you can also show subsets of your contacts by applying a filter based on
category. Read this section for detailed information.
Sort Contacts
By default, contacts are sorted in alphabetical order by Last name. You can choose to sort your contacts in
ascending (A to Z) or descending (Z to A) order by first or last name.
Note the arrow at the top of the First (name) column (
). This arrow acts as a toggle switch; if it is
pointing down, it means the list is sorted in descending order, and clicking it will cause the list to be resorted in
ascending order. The arrow will then be displayed pointing up. Clicking it again would resort the list in
descending order.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
183
Using Address Book on the Web
If you decide to sort by last name, click the Last (name) column heading. The page will refresh, with the Last
(name) column now in first position, the First (name) column in second position, and the contacts sorted
alphabetically by last name. The arrow now appears at the top of the Last (name) column.
Filter Contacts
You can also specify to show “All” your contacts on this page or just one category of contacts. Read more about
categories in Create, Edit, and Delete Categories on page 184.
1
Highlight a category from the View category list box:
2
Click Go to the right of the box. The page will refresh, and only contacts that are assigned to that category
will be displayed.
Address Book Settings
The Address Book Settings page allows you to customize your contact information by creating categories and
labels. In addition, the Settings page gives you the option of easily removing all your contacts.
Create, Edit, and Delete Categories
All your Address Book contacts are stored in categories. By default, your Address Book contains these categories:
• Work
• Family
• Friends
You can edit the names of these categories as well as create new ones, up to ten total.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
184
Using Address Book on the Web
To create a new category:
1
In the Address Book sidebar, click Settings; the Settings page appears. The page has three tabs across the
top: Categories, Labels, and Manage Contacts. Categories is selected by default:
2
In the blank box at the bottom of the list of categories, type the name of your new category, and select a
color (if you do not wish to use the assigned color). Remember, categories describe a group of contacts; for
example, you might have a number of medical doctors you want to group into a category named “MDs”.
3
If you have more categories to add, click New Category and another empty box will appear.
4
When finished adding categories, click Save. The page refreshes, and your new categories are included in
the list in alphabetical order. A new blank box is added at the bottom in case you want to add another
category.
5
You will now be able to assign contacts to this new category, as well as use it to filter (sort) messages.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
185
Using Address Book on the Web
To edit an existing category:
1
In the Address Book sidebar, click Settings; the Settings page appears, with Categories selected by default.
2
All categories appear in editable text boxes; edit the category you want to change, then click Save at the
bottom of the page.
To delete a category:
1
In the Address Book sidebar, click Settings; the Settings page appears, with Categories selected by default.
2
Click Discard Category to the right of the category you want to delete. The category is deleted; any
contacts assigned to the category are moved to the Unfiled category.
3
Click Save.
Create, Edit, and Delete Labels
All pieces of information you store about an individual contact are described using “labels”. For example, you
might have two phone numbers for a contact, one of which is labeled “Home” and the other “Work”. By default,
the Address Book includes the following labels:
• Home
• Work
• Mobile
• Fax
• Personal
You can edit the names of these labels and create new ones, up to ten total.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
186
Using Address Book on the Web
To add a label:
1
In the Address Book sidebar, click Settings; then click the Labels tab at the top of the page to open the
Labels page:
2
In the blank box at the bottom of the list of labels, type the name of your new label.
3
If you have more labels to add, click New Label and another empty box will appear.
4
When finished adding labels, click Save. The page refreshes, and your new labels are included in the list in
alphabetical order. A new blank box is added at the bottom in case you want to add another label.
5
After saving, you will be able to assign contact information to this new label, as well as view it on the Browse
Contacts page describing the contact information displayed.
To edit an existing label:
1
In the Address Book sidebar, click Settings; then click the Labels tab at the top of the page to open the
Labels page.
2
Edit the label as you wish, then click Save.
To delete a label:
1
In the Address Book sidebar, click Settings; then click the Labels tab at the top of the page to open the
Labels page.
2
Click Discard Label to the right of the label you want to delete. The label’s text box is cleared.
3
Click Save.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
187
Using Address Book on the Web
Manage Contacts
If you want to clear your Address Book of all contacts in one action, do the following:
1
In the Address Book sidebar, click Settings; then click the Manage Contacts tab at the top of the page.
2
The page tells you how many contacts you’ve stored. To discard them all, click Discard All Contacts.
3
You will be asked to confirm your deletion and warned that proceeding will permanently delete all contacts
from your Address Book; they will not be moved to Trash. To continue, click Discard All. If you change your
mind, click Cancel.
Add a Contact
You can add a contact to your Address Book by starting from scratch, or by duplicating an existing contact’s
information, then editing it. Both methods are described below.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
188
Using Address Book on the Web
Add a New Contact from Scratch
1
On the Address Book sidebar, click New Contact. The New Contact Summary page opens:
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
189
Using Address Book on the Web
2
The New Contact Summary page is divided into the following sections:
• Name – includes the contact’s name, employment information, and the category of the contact
• Phone Numbers
• Addresses
• Internet – includes email addresses and URLs
You can fill in as much of the information as you wish, including multiple addresses, phone numbers, and
Internet addresses. You must, however, add at least a first name, last name, company name, email address,
or phone number to establish a contact.
3
When you’ve completed the form, click Save. The page will refresh, and the new contact information will be
displayed.
4
If you wish to add any other information to the contact, click Edit, then click the tab that corresponds to the
type of information you wish to add or edit.
Create a New Contact by Duplicating an Existing Contact
1
From the Browse Contacts page, select the contact whose information you want to edit. The contact’s
information displays.
2
Click Copy at the top or bottom of the page. An editable form of the contact’s information will appear; the
page is labeled “Copying <Contact Name>”.
3
Edit the information to create your new contact, then click Save.
Note: If you save this contact information without making any change, you will have duplicate entries for
this contact.
Edit a Contact
To edit an existing contact, do the following:
1
From the Browse Contacts page, click the contact’s name. The contact’s information displays.
2
Click Edit at the top or bottom of the page. The contact’s Summary information page is displayed in an
editable form.
3
Edit information as you wish. You can edit the other types of information by clicking one of the tabs at the
top of the page:
• Name
• Icon
• Phone
• Address
• Internet
Note that you do not have to save your changes when you move from one type of information to another. If
you want to discard your edits on a form, click Cancel to reset the form with the original information.
4
Click Save when you’ve made all your changes, or click Cancel to discard your changes and return to your
last Browse Contacts view.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
190
Using Address Book on the Web
Discard/Retrieve a Contact
To remove an existing contact from your Address Book:
1
From the Browse Contacts page, click the contact’s name. The contact’s information displays.
2
Click Discard at the top or bottom of the page. The contact is moved to the Trash without a verification
prompt.
3
You can also remove a contact from the Browse Contacts page by checking the box for the contact, then
clicking Discard Checked.
To retrieve a discarded contact:
1
Click Trash in the sidebar. The list of discarded contacts displays.
2
Check the box to the left of the contact you wish to retrieve from the Trash.
3
From the Move checked to drop-down list, select the category you want to move the contact to, then click
Go. The contact is restored, and assigned to the selected category.
To remove all contacts:
For instructions, read Manage Contacts on page 188.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
191
Using Address Book on the Web
Import Contacts
You can import contact information from other programs into your Address Book. Note that you must first save
that contact information in the form of a flat, tab-delimited file.
1
Click Import in the sidebar. The Import page opens. This page includes step-by-step instructions for
completing the import process:
2
Complete the form as instructed on the page, then click Import.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
192
Using Address Book on the Web
Communicate with a Contact
Using stored contact information, you can quickly communicate with a contact by Email:
1
From the Browse Contacts page, click the email address of the contact with whom you wish to communicate.
The Email application opens, with the New Message page displayed. The To field is automatically filled in
with the contact’s Email address.
2
Complete the message form, then click Send. You can also choose to Save as Draft, or to discard the
message by clicking Cancel.
3
Once you take action on the message, your Email Inbox opens. You are not returned to the Address Book.
Empty the Trash
All discarded contacts are moved to the Trash category. You should periodically remove items from Trash by
doing the following:
1
From the Browse Contacts page, click Trash in the sidebar. The contacts in the Trash appear.
2
Click Empty Trash at the top or bottom of the page. You’ll be asked to confirm your action since the contacts
will be permanently deleted. Click OK to proceed, or click Cancel to return to the Trash.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
193
Using Calendar on the Web
21. Using Calendar on the Web
You can view the schedule you created on your device while you’re at your desktop computer! Not only can you
create, edit, and discard events from the Web interface, you can import Calendar events from popular desktop
applications. Learn all about Calendar on the Web by reading the topics in this chapter:
•
•
•
•
•
Opening Calendar on the Web on page 194
Settings on page 196
View Events on page 197
Add an Event on page 199
Edit an Event on page 202
•
•
•
•
Discard an Event on page 202
Manage Your Trash on page 203
Import Contacts on page 204
Manage Events on page 197
Opening Calendar on the Web
First, open your Jump page by following the instructions in Signing In To the Desktop Interface on page 166.
Open the Calendar application by clicking
on your Jump page button bar, or by clicking the
Calendar icon in the Calendar section of the Jump page. The Day View opens by default, with the current day
displayed:
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
194
Using Calendar on the Web
On the left side of the page you see the sidebar:
In addition to links to the various Calendar pages, you’ll see the current and next month displayed. To go to the
Day view for any day in these two months, click the day.
Your Web Calendar is always synchronized with the Calendar on your device.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
195
Using Calendar on the Web
Settings
The Settings page contains two sections:
• Calendar Settings - Define default settings for how you view and set up new events.
• Manage Events - Discard multiple events easily.
To open the Settings page, click Settings in the Calendar sidebar:
Calendar Settings
1
When creating events, decide between the following two options when setting the event schedule:
• Use duration - If selected, the New Event page will ask you to specify an event start time and duration
rather than a start time and end time.
• Use end time - If selected, the New Event page will ask you to specify an event start and end time rather
than a start time and duration.
2
Default Event Duration - Set the default event duration by selecting hours and minutes from the drop-down
boxes.
3
Day View Grid Size - Set the increment in which time is displayed in the day view by selecting a value from
the drop-down list.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
196
Using Calendar on the Web
4
Starting View - Determine the view in which your Calendar will open when selected from the Jump page.
5
Day view start time... - Set the time at which the day view will start unless there are earlier events
scheduled.
6
Day view end time... - Set the time at which the day view will end unless there are later events scheduled.
7
To save any change you make to your settings, click Save.
Manage Events
If you want to clean up your Calendar, but don’t want to have to discard events one by one, you can do so from
the Manage Events section of the Settings page. You may want to use this feature if you are preparing to import
events from another program and want to remove all events first. Or, you might have a large number of events
that are more than a month in the past that you would like to remove. Using the options under Manage Events,
you can easily accomplish this.
1
To discard all events older than 30 days, click the Discard Past Events link. You will be asked to confirm the
discard because the events will be permanently discarded, not moved to Trash. Click Discard to continue, or
click Cancel to return to the Manage Events page.
2
To discard all your events, regardless of how old they are, click the Discard All Events link. You will be
asked to confirm the discard because the events will be permanently discarded, not moved to Trash. Click
Discard to continue, or click Cancel to return to Managing Events.
3
To save any change you make to your settings, click Save.
View Events
You can view your events in Day, Week, or Month view. Each view is described below.
Week View
In the Week view, you see all events for a single selected week. For each event, you see the start and end time,
and the title of the event in the hour time block in which the event begins. If events overlap, they are shown
consecutively.
From within the Week view, you can move around your Calendar as follows:
• back one week by clicking Previous at the top of the page
• forward one week by clicking Next at the top of the page
• to a specific day in the current or next month by selecting the day in the month calendars displayed in the
sidebar
• to the Day view for a specific day in the week currently being viewed by clicking the day at the top of the
Week view
• to the current day by either clicking the day in the month calendar in the sidebar (the current day is
highlighted) or by clicking Go opposite the Month/Day/Year box at the bottom of the sidebar.
At the bottom of the Week view, all tasks you’ve entered in the To Do application that are due on the displayed
day (but not yet completed) will be listed. You can mark a task as completed by clicking the check box. Also, you
can open the Task Information page by clicking the task name. On that page, you can mark a task as completed
by clicking Mark Completed.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
197
Using Calendar on the Web
Day View
In the Day view, you can see all events for a single selected day. For each event, you see:
• title of the event
• event’s icon (if you assigned an icon)
From within the Day view, you can move around your calendar as follows:
• back one day by clicking Previous at the top of the view
• forward one day by clicking Next at the top of the view
• to the current day either by clicking the day in the month calendar in the sidebar (the current day is
highlighted) or by clicking Go opposite the Month/Day/Year box at the bottom of the sidebar
At the bottom of the Day view, all tasks you’ve entered in the To Do application that are due on that day (but not
yet completed) will be listed. You can mark a task as completed by clicking the check box
. Also, you
can open the Task Information page by clicking the task name. On that page, you can mark a task as completed
by clicking Mark Completed.
Month View
In the Month view, you can see all events for a single selected month. For each event, you see:
• title of the event
• start time of the event
From within the Month view, you can move around your Calendar as follows:
• back one month by clicking Previous at the top of the view
• forward one month by clicking Next at the top of the view
• to the Day view for a specific day in the previous, next, or current month by clicking the date in the Month
view or in the month calendars displayed in the sidebar.
• to the current day by either clicking the day in the month calendar in the sidebar (the current day is
highlighted) or by clicking Go opposite the Month/Day/Year box at the bottom of the sidebar
When you are viewing the month that contains the current day, it’s highlighted to make it easily identifiable.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
198
Using Calendar on the Web
View an Event
You can select and view an event’s details from any of the views by clicking the event name. This opens the
Event Details page, where the following information is displayed:
If you want to edit the event, click Edit to open the event in an editable form.
Add an Event
From the Calendar sidebar, click New Event. This opens the New Event page.
Tip: From the Daily and Week views, you can quickly open the New Event page by clicking the time slot in which
you want to add the event.
Event information is divided into two categories: Basics and Reminder & Repetition. The Basics tab is selected by
default.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
199
Using Calendar on the Web
Complete Basic Information
1
In the TITLE box, type in a short, descriptive name for the event. If you don’t, you’ll be prompted to add a
title.
2
In the DATE box, select the date for the event. By default, the current day is selected.
3
In the TIME section, set the start time and duration of the event, or the start and end time of the event
(which option is presented depends on your Settings; by default, it is start time and duration).
4
In the NOTES box, type any comments you want to make about the event. This is optional.
5
In the ICON section, select an icon to represent the event.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
200
Using Calendar on the Web
Complete Reminder & Repetition Information
If you wish to set up reminders or if the event is a repeating event, click the Reminder & Repetition tab:
1
In the REMINDER section, specify whether or not (and when) you want to be reminded when the event is
going to occur: don’t remind, or by device alert.
2
To make the event repeat on a regular interval, in the REPETITION section, select a repeat interval from
these choices:
• Just this once (that is, no repetition; this is selected by default).
• Every day.
• Every day of the week (where day of the week equals the day of the week on which the event is first
scheduled to occur; for example, Every Saturday).
• Every month on the nn (where nn is the date of the first occurrence of the event; e.g., Every month on
the 21st).
• Every month on the day of month (where day of month equals the specific day in the month when the
event first occurs; e.g., Every month on the third Tuesday).
• Every year on date (where date equals the date of the first occurrence of the event; e.g., Every year on
May 21.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
201
Using Calendar on the Web
If you want additional reminder options, click More Options. You will then have the following options:
• Just this once (i.e., no repetition; this is selected by default).
• Every n day(s).
• Every S M T W T F S (select one or more days of the week).
• Every n month(s) on the day of month (where day of month equals the specific day in the month when
the event first occurs; e.g., Every 2 months on the 21st).
• Every n month(s) on the nth day of the week of the month (where day of the week equals the day of
the week on which the event is first scheduled to occur; e.g., Every 3 months on the 1st Monday of the
month.
• Every n year(s) on Month Day (e.g., Every 1 year on April 15).
3
Specify a date on which the event will stop repeating.
4
Click Save.
Add an All-Day Event:
1
From the Calendar sidebar, click New All-Day Event. This opens the New Event page.
2
Type a title to identify your event.
3
Select the date on which the event begins; then select the number of days it will last.
4
Type a note if you wish.
5
Select an icon to represent the event.
6
If you wish to set up reminders or if the event is a repeating event, click the Reminder & Repetition tab.
7
In the REMINDER section, specify whether or not you want to be reminded when the event is going to
occur, and specify a method of reminding.
8
To make the event repeat on a regular interval, in the REPETITION section, select a repeat interval. The
choices are the same as for events that do not last all day.
9
Specify a date on which the event will stop repeating.
10 Click Save.
Tip: You can convert a timed event to an all-day event by editing the task details and selecting Convert to All
Day.
Edit an Event
1
Open the event details page by clicking the event name from any of the Calendar views.
2
Click Edit. This opens the event in an editable form; the event Basics tab is selected by default.
3
Make your changes to the basic event information. Note that if you are editing a timed event, you can
convert it to an all-day event by clicking Convert to All Day. If the event is an all-day event, you can change
it to a timed event by clicking Convert to Timed.
4
Click the Reminder & Repetition tab if you wish to edit reminder or repetition information.
5
When you done with your edits, click Save.
Discard an Event
1
Highlight the event from any of your Calendar views, then click Edit.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
202
Using Calendar on the Web
2
Click Discard at the top or bottom of the page. The event is moved to the Trash.
Manage Your Trash
Once an event is in the Trash, you can delete it (completely remove it from the system) or retrieve it (move it
back into your calendar).
1
To open your Trash, click Trash in the Calendar sidebar. All discarded events are displayed on the right side
of the page.
2
To remove the events from your system completely, click the Empty Trash button. You’ll be asked to confirm
your action since the events will be permanently deleted. Click OK to proceed, or click Cancel to return to
the Trash.
3
To retrieve an event, check the box on the left side of the event, then click Retrieve Checked. The event will
be removed from the list in the Trash; a message at the top of the page confirms the retrieval.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
203
Using Calendar on the Web
Import Contacts
You can import event information from other programs into your Calendar. Note that you must first save that
information in the form of a flat, tab-delimited file.
1
Click Import in the sidebar. The Import page opens:
2
This page includes step-by-step instructions for completing the import process. Complete the form as
instructed, then click Import.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
204
Camera Gallery on the Web
22. Camera Gallery on the Web
View all your device photos full-size and in color! Just sign in to the desktop Web interface of the Camera
application and click the link to Camera to open your gallery. Learn more by reading the topics in this chapter:
• Opening Camera Gallery on the Web on
page 205
• Sort Your Photos on page 206
• Rename Your Photos on page 206
• Discard a Photo on page 206
• Attach Photo(s) to an Email on page 207
Opening Camera Gallery on the Web
First, open your Jump page by following the instructions in Signing In To the Desktop Interface on page 166.
Open the Camera application by clicking
in your Jump page button bar. Your Camera Gallery
opens:
All photos are shown on the page in chronological order. The default order is the newest (most recent) photos
first (upper left corner).
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
205
Camera Gallery on the Web
Sort Your Photos
You can easily resort your photos by selecting a different sort order from the Sort drop-down list.
1
Open the Sort drop down list.
2
Select your sort order; you can choose from:
• Newest First (default selection)
• Oldest First
• Alphabetical
3
Click Go.
4
This sort order will stay in effect until you sign out. The next time you open your Camera Gallery, the order
will revert to the default order (Newest First). Note that the order your photos are displayed will not
necessarily match the order you set on the device.
Rename Your Photos
When you take a photo, it is saved as a color .jpg with a default name. Since the default names are nonintelligent (e.g, Photo 5.jpg), you may want to change the name to something more descriptive. Photo names
are displayed in editable text boxes; to change a name:
1
Click in the photo name text box to make it editable.
2
Type the new name. Keep in mind that names can be no longer than 32 characters.
3
Click Save Name Changes.
Discard a Photo
Warning! Unlike other Web applications, there is no Trash for photos. You do not have the option of discarding a
photo from your Camera Gallery, then later retrieving it.
To discard one or more photos:
1
Select the check box to the left of the photo(s) you want to discard. Click Check All if you want to discard all
your photos.
2
Click Discard Checked. You will be asked to confirm your deletion.
3
Click OK to permanently discard the photo(s), or click Cancel to keep your photos.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
206
Camera Gallery on the Web
Attach Photo(s) to an Email
You can easily attach photos to your emails. There are two ways to do this.
From the Camera Gallery page:
1
Select the check box to the left of the photo(s) you want to attach to your email.
2
Click Send Checked. This opens the Compose Email page, with the selected photo(s) already attached.
3
Write your email, then send it.
From the Email Compose page:
1
Click Attach
2
Check the photo(s) you want to attach, then click Send Checked. Your Camera Gallery is dismissed and your
email is displayed, with the images shown as attachments.
3
If you decide to attach additional photos, click Attach
April 15, 2003
Photos; this opens the Camera Gallery page.
Photos and repeat the process.
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
207
Keeping a To Do List on the Web
23. Keeping a To Do List on the Web
Keep up-to-date with all your tasks using the desktop Web interface of the To Do application. All the tasks you
create, edit, or discard from the Web are syncronized with your tasks on the device. Read these topics to learn
how to manage all your tasks from the Web:
•
•
•
•
•
Opening To Do on the Web on page 208
About To Do Items on page 209
Browse Tasks on page 209
Add a New Task on page 210
Edit a Task on page 210
•
•
•
•
Mark a Task as Complete on page 210
Discard a Task on page 210
Discard Completed Tasks on page 210
Manage Trash on page 211
Opening To Do on the Web
First, open your Jump page by following the instructions in Signing In To the Desktop Interface on page 166.
Open the To Do application by clicking
in your Jump page button bar, or by clicking the To Do icon in
the To Do section of the Jump page. This opens the Browse Tasks page:
Your Jump page shows all your tasks that are both “upcoming” and “not completed”.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
208
Keeping a To Do List on the Web
On the left side of the page you see the sidebar, which includes links for New Task, Browse Tasks (the current
selection), Trash, and Empty Trash:
About To Do Items
Every task in your To Do list has the following “attributes”:
• Title - a short description of your task (up to 40 characters)
• Due Date - the date the task is due (note that tasks can’t be due at a particular time during the day)
• Notes - information in addition to the title, up to 250 characters (which is the size of a medium
paragraph)
• Completion Status - Complete or Incomplete
• Due Date Status - Past Due, Due Today, or Upcoming
How many tasks can I store? You can store up to 50 tasks at one time, including the tasks you’ve moved
to the Trash. By clicking the Discard Completed button at the bottom of any of the To Do Browse pages, you
can choose to discard all completed tasks.
Browse Tasks
When you open the Browse Tasks page, by default, all incomplete tasks are displayed, sorted as follows:
• Overdue tasks appear at the top of the list, with a status of Overdue in red.
• Due Today tasks are listed in the order you entered them.
• Upcoming tasks are listed in chronological order in bold.
For each task, the title, status (if overdue or completed), and due date (if applicable) are displayed.
To view all tasks, including completed tasks, select All from the View drop-down list, then click Go. All tasks –
overdue, finished, and incomplete – are listed together in chronological order.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
209
Keeping a To Do List on the Web
Add a New Task
1
In the To Do sidebar, click New Task, or click New Task in the To Do section of the Jump page. This opens
the New Task page:
2
Fill in the form with the information describing the task.
• Task Name: Can be up to 40 characters long.
• Due by: Select one of the options (Never, Today, Tomorrow, or Other). If you select Other, specify a
specific date by typing in a month, day, and year (today’s date is filled in by default). The task will also
appear on your Calendar on the assigned date.
• Notes: Add a note if you wish, up to 250 characters long.
3
Click Save. If you don’t want to save the note after all, click Cancel.
Edit a Task
1
On the Browse Tasks page, select the task you want to edit by clicking the title of the task. The Task Details
page opens. Click Edit to open the Task Details in an editable form.
2
Make your changes to the task’s Basic Information or Notes sections. When finished, click Save. If you
decide to discard your changes, click Cancel. If you want to discard the task, click Discard.
Mark a Task as Complete
To change the status of a task to complete:
1
On the Browse Tasks page, check the box to the left of the task you want to mark as completed.
2
Click Marked Checked as Completed.
3
Click Save at the bottom of the page.
Note: You can also mark a task as completed by opening the Task Details page and then clicking Mark
Completed.
To mark a completed task as incomplete, open the Task Details page and click Mark Incomplete.
Discard a Task
1
On the Browse Tasks page, check the box to the left of the task you want to discard. You can select as many
tasks as you wish.
2
Click Discard Checked at the bottom of the list of tasks. All selected tasks will be moved to Trash; a
message at the top of the page confirms your action.
Discard Completed Tasks
You can easily remove all completed tasks by clicking Discard Checked on the Browse Tasks page. The
completed tasks are moved to the Trash.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
210
Keeping a To Do List on the Web
Manage Trash
You can have a total of 50 tasks in the system at one time, including items in the Trash. This means you’ll want
to periodically empty your Trash, or you’ll be left with no space for new tasks. Once a task is in the Trash, you
can discard it (completely remove it from the system) or retrieve it (move it back into your list of tasks).
1
To open your Trash, click Trash in the sidebar on the To Do page. All discarded tasks are displayed on the
right side of the page in descending order of due date.
2
To remove the tasks from your system completely, click Empty Trash. You’ll be asked to confirm your action
since the tasks will be permanently deleted. Click OK to proceed, or click Cancel to return to the Trash.
3
To retrieve a task, select the check box on the left side of the task, then click Retrieve Checked. The task
will be removed from the list in the Trash; a message at the top of the page confirms the retrieval.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
211
Keeping Notes on the Web
24. Keeping Notes on the Web
You can read your notes, type new notes, edit existing notes, and discard notes...all while you’re working at your
computer! Any changes you make on the Web interface will be synchronized with the Notes application on the
device. In this chapter, you can read about how to use Notes on the Web:
• Opening Notes on the Web on page 212
• Browse Notes on page 212
• Add a Note on page 213
• Edit a Note on page 213
• Discard a Note on page 213
• Manage Your Trash on page 214
Opening Notes on the Web
First, open your Jump page by following the instructions in Signing In To the Desktop Interface on page 166.
Open the Notes application by clicking
on your Jump page button bar, or by clicking the Notes icon
in the Notes section of the Jump page. By default, the Browse Notes view is displayed:
Browse Notes
The Browse Notes page lists all your current notes on the right side of the page in alphabetical order, as shown
in the illustration above.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
212
Keeping Notes on the Web
On the left side of the page you see the sidebar, which includes links for New Note, Browse Notes (the current
selection), and Trash:
Add a Note
1
In the Notes sidebar, click New Note. This opens the New Note page.
Tip: If you are on the Jump page, you can open the New Note page directly by clicking New Note in the
Notes section of the page.
2
When the New Note page opens, your cursor is automatically placed in a text box; type your note. It can be
up to 8000 characters (on color devices) or 1000 characters (on grayscale devices), including returns and
spaces. Any email addresses in the note will be linked to the Email application's Compose page. URLs in the
note will be displayed as active links.
3
When you finish your note, click Save. If you decide not to keep the note, click Cancel to return to the
Browse Notes page.
4
After clicking Save, you are returned to the Browse Notes page, with the note you just created added to the
list on the right.
Edit a Note
1
On the Browse Notes page, click Edit in the far right column for the note you want to edit. The note opens in
an editable text box.
2
Make your changes to the note, then click Save. If you decide to discard your changes, click Cancel.
3
After clicking Save, you are returned to the Browse Notes page. The note you just edited will appear with
your changes, and the modified time will be updated to reflect the date and time you saved the edited note.
Discard a Note
1
On the Browse Notes page, check the box to the left of the note you want to remove. You can select as many
notes as you want.
2
Click Discard Checked at the top or bottom of the list of notes. All selected notes will be moved to Trash; a
message at the top of the page confirms the discard.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
213
Keeping Notes on the Web
Manage Your Trash
You can have a total of 50 notes (on color devices) or 20 notes (on grayscale devices) in the system at one time,
including the notes in Trash. This means you’ll want to periodically empty your Trash, or you’ll be left with no
space for new notes. Once a note is in the Trash, you can delete it (completely remove it from the system) or
retrieve it (move it back into your list of notes).
1
To open your Trash, click Trash in the Notes sidebar. All discarded notes are displayed on the right side of the
page in alphabetical order.
2
To remove the notes from your system completely, click the Empty Trash button. You’ll be asked to confirm
your action since the messages will be permanently deleted. Click OK to proceed, or click Cancel to return to
the Trash.
3
To retrieve a note, check the box on the left side of the note, then click Retrieve Checked at the bottom of
the page. The note will be removed from the list of notes in Trash; a message at the top of the page confirms
the retrieval. The modification date and time are not updated since the note itself has not been modified.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
214
Settings on the Web
25. Settings on the Web
Go to Settings on the Web to set your time zone, view system information, change your name as it appears on
outgoing emails, or change your password. Read the topics in this chapter to learn more:
• Opening Settings on the Web on page 215
• Account Information on page 216
• System Information on page 216
Opening Settings on the Web
First, open your Jump page by following the instructions in Signing In To the Desktop Interface on page 166.
Open your Settings on the Web by clicking Settings on the Jump page’s top menu bar. You will see three tabs on
this page: Account Information and System Information. Account Information is selected by default:
Each tab section is described in more detail below.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
215
Settings on the Web
Account Information
Change Real Name
Go to this section if you want to change the name that appears at the close of your email messages. Simply type
the name that you want to appear in the text boxes, then click Save.
Time Zone
To view your current time zone settings, look in this section of the Account Information page. Your current home
time zone, the time and date, and the Daylight Saving Time status is displayed.
To change your home time zone, do the following:
1
Select the option button opposite one of the time zone options:
• time zone in the United States
• time zone by offset from GMT
2
Make a selection from the drop-down list box for that option.
3
Click Save.
System Information
The System Information tab displays the following in a non-editable format:
• Username - The ID you use to sign in to the T-Mobile service.
• Device phone number - In case you forget it.
• SIM ID - You may need this number if you need to contact Customer Care
• Device ID - You may need this number if you need to contact Customer Care.
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
216
Index
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
Index
Symbols
# (pound) tone
entering while on a call, 65
* (star) tone
entering while on a call, 65
.bmp files
attached to email, 91
.doc files
attached to email, 91
.gif files
attached to email, 91
.jpg files
attached to email, 91
.pdf files
attached to email, 91
.png files
attached to email, 91
@ key
using, 19
A
accessories (included with purchase), 9
account
setting up, 10
add new To field line in email message, 94
Add to Address Book dialog box, 96
adding
Address Book category, 123
Address Book label, 125
Address Book label on Web, 187
AIM buddy, 80
AIM group, 79
AIM screen names, 75
bookmark, 54
bookmark folder, 55
Calendar event, 128
email recipients to Address Book, 96
email sender to Address Book, 95
note, 156
note on the Web, 213
text message sender to Address Book, 113
Address Book application
adding a category, 123
adding a label, 125
default categories, 123
April 15, 2003
default labels, 125
discarding a category, 124
discarding a label, 126
editing a category, 123
editing a label, 125
editing existing category, 123
filtering contacts, 118
importing contacts from SIM, 126
labels, 124
mapping a contact’s address, 122
Settings screen, 123
sorting contacts, 119
storage maximums, 117
Address Book Web application
accessing, 182
adding a contact, 188
communicating with contacts, 193
creating categories, 185
creating labels, 187
default categories, 184
discard all contacts, 188
discarding a label, 187
discarding categories, 186
discarding contacts, 191
editing a label, 187
editing categories, 186
editing contacts, 190
editing labels, 187
filtering contacts, 184
importing contacts, 192
opening, 182
sorting contacts, 183
adjusting volume
for system sounds, 46
when on the phone, 62
AIM
adding a friend to your Buddy List, 80
adding a group to your Buddy List, 79
adding screen names, 75
blocking a buddy, 81
buddy availability icons, 78
Buddy List screen, 78
custom buddy alerts, 81
discarding a buddy, 81
discarding a group, 79
editing a buddy, 80
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
217
Index
enabling sound for alerts, 85
ending a conversation, 82
keyboard shortcuts, 75
limit to number of open conversations, 82
new message alert, 78
preview screen, 74
removing screen names, 77
renaming a group, 79
setting away messages, 83
settings, 84
signing off, 77
signing on, 76
starting a conversation, 82
switching screen names, 77
switching to a conversation, 83
unblocking a buddy, 81
alerts
customizing for individual buddies, 81
setting for email, 105
setting up for AIM, 85
when receiving new AIM message, 78
Alt key
locking, 18
unlocking, 18
answering the phone, 67
application
selecting, 49
version numbers, 46
application splash screens
about, 49
ascending order
sorting contacts in, 119
assigning
keys for application shortcuts, 39
Speed Dial numbers, 73
attachments to email
opening on the Web, 171
photos, 145
status indicator, 89
attachments to email (incoming)
opening, 91
supported, 91
attachments to email (outgoing)
attaching files from your computer, 174
attaching photos, 173
limits, 173
AutoSave capture mode, 142
AutoText
creating rules, 34
April 15, 2003
discarding rules, 34
availability icons, AIM, 78
away messages, 83
B
Back button, using, 21
backlighting
turning on/off, 18
balloon indicators in AIM, 83
battery
charge indicator, 16
charging, 11
charging time, 12
conserving power, 12
use & standby times, 12
when completely discharged, 12
battery charger
attaching to device, 11
connection indicator, 16
BCC field, Compose screen, 94
blocking an AIM buddy, 81
bookmarks
adding, 54
definition, 54
discarding, 55
editing, 55
viewing existing, 54
brightness, screen
adjusting, 33
Browse All Notes screen, 154
Browse Contacts screen
about, 117
menu shortcuts, 118
Browse Email screen
about, 88
menu shortcuts, 90
Browse Messages screen
menu shortcuts, 110
Browse Tasks screen, To Do application, 148
Browse Trashed Notes screen, Notes application,
157
Bubbles, how to play, 161
buddies
adding, 80
blocking, 81
discarding, 81
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
218
Index
editing, 80
unblocking, 81
buddy availability icons, 78
Buddy List screen, 78
C
cache, size in Web Browser, 58
Calendar application
copying an existing event, 131
creating an event, 128
discarding an event, 132
editing an event, 132
emptying Trash, 139
event definition, 127
going to a specific day, 139
going to the current day, 139
keyboard shortcuts, 128
moving an event, 131
retrieving an event from Trash, 138
selecting an event icon, 129
setting an event reminder, 130
setting an event to repeat, 130
splash screen, 127
using the date picker, 129
view shortcuts, 132
views, about, 132
Calendar Web application
accessing, 194
adding an all-day event, 202
creating an event, 199
discarding all events, 197
discarding an event, 202
discarding events older than 30 days, 197
editing an event, 202
emptying Trash, 203
importing events, 204
retrieving an event from Trash, 203
setting an event reminder, 201
setting day view grid size, 196
setting day view start and end times, 196
setting default event duration, 196
setting default view, 196
viewing an event, 199
views, about, 197
call forwarding
setting up, 71
turning off, 72
Call Log
about, 68
April 15, 2003
clearing, 70
views, 68
call timer, Phone application
viewing and resetting, 71
call waiting, how to respond, 67
Caller ID, about, 67
calling
a phone number, 63
a second phone number, 66
calling back sender of text message, 114
Camera application
attaching to email, 145
capturing a photo, 142
changing an image name, 145
discarding an image, 146
flipping an image, 143
Gallery, 143
maximum images device can store, 143
menu shortcuts, 141
selecting images, 144
shutter button, 143
sorting photos, 146
what to do when Gallery is full, 145
camera jack, illustration, 25
Camera Web application
accessing, 205
attaching to email, 207
discarding photos, 206
renaming photos, 206
sorting photos, 206
camera, inserting in device, 141
capitalize new sentences, AutoText feature, 34
capture modes, about, 142
carrying case, how to use, 12
categories (Address Book)
creating, 123
creating on the Web, 185
discarding, 124
discarding on the Web, 186
editing existing, 123
editing on the Web, 186
filtering by, 118
CC field, Compose screen, 94
charging your device, 11
clearing your Call Log, 70
code
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
219
Index
default SIM PIN, 28
setting privacy code for device, 41
Code Monkey, how to play, 162
completing a task, 150
Compose Message screen
menu shortcuts, 110
Compose screen
menu shortcuts, 90
composing
new email message, 94
new text message, 112
conference calling, with Phone application, 66
connectivity status indicators, 16
Contact Info screen
menu shortcuts, 118
contact information
dialing from information, 65
minimum required to create a contact, 120
contacting an Address Book contact, 121
contacting Customer Care, 117
contacts
communicating with using Web application,
193
discarding on Web, 191
contacts (Address Book)
adding email recipient, 96
adding email sender, 95
adding on the Web, 188
adding text message sender, 113
browsing a list, 117
communicating with, 121
creating, 119
discarding, 121
editing, 121
editing on Web, 190
finding, 122
number you can store, 117
retrieve, 121
searching for, 122
sorting, 119
context menus, about, 20
contrast, screen
adjusting, 33
control buttons
about, 19
Back button, 21
illustration, 19
April 15, 2003
Jump button, 21
Menu button, 19
wheel, 22
Controls
illustration, 33
image contrast slider bar, 33
mute button, 33
opening, 33
sound volume slider bar, 33
conversations
ending an AIM, 82
how many you can have open, 82
indicators, 83
starting an AIM, 82
switching to a particular AIM session, 83
counter, number of photos remaining, 144
creating
Address Book category, 123
Address Book contact, 119
Address Book label, 125
Address Book label on Web, 187
an event, 128
email folders, 103
new note, 156
new To Do task, 149
cursor, text
meaning of shape, 26
custom buddy alerts, 81
custom email folders, number you can create, 102
Customer Care
contacting, 117
Customer Care number & Web site, 13
D
date & time
indicator, 16
setting, 37
date picker, using, 129
Day Calendar view
details, 135
summary, 133
default
Address Book categories, 123
Address Book labels, 125
SIM PIN number, 28
deleting
entries in Call Log, 70
POP3 account, 101
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
220
Index
text, 26
descending order
sorting contacts in, 119
Desktop Interface, 166
device applications on the Web, 166
device ID
viewing through the Web interface, 216
where to view number, 46
device phone number
listed in Phone Settings, 70
listed in System Info, 46
diagram of parts of device, 14
dialing
from contact information, 65
recent numbers, 64
using letters, 64
with keyboard, 63
with keypad, 63
dialog boxes
Add to Address Book, 96
directional pad
about, 18
using, 18
Discard Category, Address Book menu option, 124
Discard Label, Address Book menu option, 126
Discard Note keyboard shortcut, 154
discarding
a Calendar event, 132
a note, 156
a note on the Web, 213
Address Book category, 124
Address Book contact, 121
Address Book contact on Web, 191
Address Book label, 126
Address Book label on the Web, 187
AIM buddy, 81
AIM group, 79
all Address Book contacts on the Web, 188
bookmark folder, 55
email folder, 103
email message, 97
photo, 146
text message, 113114
To Do task, 151
Web Browser bookmark, 55
display icons, 15
display, opening and closing, 15
April 15, 2003
displaying, 42
dots in title bar, meaning, 16
D-pad
about, 18
using, 18
draft, saving email as, 95
Drafts folder
about, 102
icon, 89
due date, setting for a To Do task, 149
E
Edit Category dialog box, 123
Edit Folder dialog box, 103
editing
Address Book category, 123
Address Book contact, 121
Address Book contact on Web, 190
Address Book label, 125
Address Book label on the Web, 187
Address Book label on Web, 187
AIM buddy, 80
bookmark, 55
bookmark folder, 55
Calendar event, 132
current page’s URL, 53
email folder, 103
existing Speed Dial number, 61
Identity information, 120
note, 156
note on the Web, 213
POP3 accounts, 100
To Do task details, 150
ellipsis
meaning in a folded note, 154
Email application, 95
adding email recipients to contacts, 96
adding email sender to contacts, 95
discarding a draft message, 94
discarding an in-progress message, 97
Drafts folder icon, 89
emptying Trash, 97
forwarding email message, 95
Inbox folder icon, 89
number of custom folders you can create, 102
opening hypertext links, 92
reading an email message, 91
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
221
Index
Saved folder icon, 89
saving an email as draft, 95
saving outgoing messages, 106
sending a message, 94
Sent folder, 106
Sent folder icon, 89
setting alerts, 105
setting ringtones, 105
setting up POP3 accounts, 98
Settings screen, 104
sorting messages, 92
space limitations, 107
specifying primary email account, 98
splash screen, 87
status indicators, 89
Trash folder icon, 89
user-defined folder icon, 89
email folders
about, 102
creating, 103
discarding, 103
editing, 103
setting preferences, 102
system folders, 88
email messages
attaching a photo on the Web, 207
composing, 94
discarding, 97
discarding on the Web, 181
forwarding, 95
moving to another folder, 93
replying, 95
sending message, 94
sorting, 92
Email Settings screen
menu shortcuts, 90
email signature, creating or editing, 100
email status, changing to unread, 92
Email Web application
about your Inbox, 170
accessing, 169
automatically saving copies of sent mail, 175
collecting mail from POP3 accounts, 180
discarding an email, 181
editing folders, 176
editing POP3 accounts, 178
managing your mailbox size, 175
moving messages to folders, 180
opening an attachment, 171
April 15, 2003
reading an email, 171
sending an email, 172
settings, 174
specifying primary email account, 178
emailing
photos, 145
emptying
Address Book Trash, 122
Calendar Trash, 139
Email Trash, 97
Notes Trash, 157
Phone Messages Trash, 114
To Do Trash, 152
enabling mute, 33
ending
AIM conversation, 82
phone call, 67
error sending email
status indicator, 89
event
copying to create new, 131
creating, 128
creating on the Web, 199
definition, 127
discarding, 132
discarding on the Web, 202
editing, 132
editing on the Web, 202
moving from one time to another, 131
retrieving a discarded event on the Web, 203
selecting an icon on device, 129
setting an event reminder on the Web, 201
viewing on the Web, 199
F
favorite Web page, saving, 54
files
attaching to Web Email messages, 174
filtering contacts in the Address Book, 118
finding an Address Book contact, 122
Flip menu option, Camera application, 143
flipping a captured image, 143
folder, 93
moving messages on the Web, 180
folders, bookmarks
adding, 55
discard, 55
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
222
Index
editing, 55
folding notes, 154
Forward..., Email menu item, 95
forwarded
email status indicator, 89
forwarding
email message, 95
phone message, 113
forwarding calls, setup, 71
From Address field, Edit Accounts screen, 101
From field, Compose screen, 94
From Name field, Edit Accounts screen, 101
full photo Gallery, what to do!, 145
full screen view
toggling in browser, 52
Full Screen view, photo Gallery, 144
G
Gallery
photo views, 143
selecting all photos, 145
sorting photos, 146
what to do when photo Gallery is full, 145
games
Bubbles, 161
Code Monkey, 162
Lab Ratz, 164
Rock & Rocket, 158
Shuffle, 163
graphic files
.bmp attachments, 91
.gif attachments, 91
.jpg attachments, 91
.png attachments, 91
groups
adding to IM, 79
discarding, 79
renaming, 79
H
handling a SIM, 29
handset
using as phone, 62
headset
jack, 25
using with phone, 62
April 15, 2003
highlighting a note, 154
home page
opening in browser, 53
set for Browser, 57
hypertext links
open in email, 92
I
icons
buddy availability in AIM, 78
Drafts folder, 89
Inbox folder, 89
incoming call, 69
meaning of icons in title bar, 15
missed call, 69
outgoing call, 69
Saved folder, 89
selecting for an event on device, 129
Sent folder, 89
Trash folder, 89
user-defined folder, 89
Identification Tag
filling in, 42
removing, 42
Identity screen
editing, 120
illegal characters, in text messages, 112
IM buddies
adding, 80
blocking, 81
discarding, 81
editing, 80
unblocking, 81
IM groups
adding, 79
discarding, 79
renaming, 79
image contrast slider bar, 33
images
maximum device can store, 143
importing contacts from SIM card, 126
IMSI number, 27
Inbox
on the Web, 170
Inbox folder
about, 102
icon, 89
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
223
Index
included accessories, in box with device, 9
incoming call icon, 69
indicators
AIM conversations, 83
battery charge, 16
battery charger connection, 16
current date & time, 16
network connection lost, 16
out-of-network, 74
Phone application status, 60
radio signal strength, 16
screen identifier in title bar, 16
standard display, 15
infrared port, about, 25
inserting a SIM, 28
inserting the camera in your device, 141
Instant Messaging application
adding a friend to Buddy List, 80
adding a group to Buddy List, 79
adding screen names, 75
away messages, 83
blocking a buddy, 81
buddy availability icons, 78
Buddy List screen, 78
custom buddy alerts, 81
discarding a buddy, 81
discarding a group, 79
editing a buddy, 80
enabling sound, 85
ending an AIM conversation, 82
Offline group, 81
preview screen, 74
removing screen names, 77
renaming a group, 79
settings, 84
signing off, 77
signing on, 76
starting an AIM conversation, 82
switching AIM conversations, 83
switching screen names, 77
unblocking a buddy, 81
Instant Messaging Service
keyboard shortcuts, 75
J
jacks
camera, 25
headset, 25
April 15, 2003
Jump button
location, 49
use, 21
Jump page (Web), about, 167
Jump screen
about, 48
about splash screens, 49
opening, 49
selecting an application, 49
Jump screen menu, 50
Jump shortcuts, setting, 38
K
Key Assignment dialog box, 39
key guard
activating automatically, 39
activating manually, 39
unlocking device, 40
key guard display message
how to set up, 40
message length limit, 40
keyboard
@ key, 19
dialing, 63
repeat delay, 43
repeat rate, 43
setting preferences, 43
symbols defined, 18
keyboard shortcuts
Add Bookmark, 52
AIM, 75
back in browser, 52
Calendar application, 128
Go To dialog box, 52
History, 52
Home Page, 52
in Phone application, 60
in Web Browser application, 52
Instant Messaging application, 75
Notes menu items, 154
Refresh, 52
scrolling in Web pages, 52
Stop Loading, 52
To Do application, 148
View Bookmarks, 52
Web Browser, 52
keypad dialing, 63
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
224
Index
L
Lab Ratz, how to play, 164
labels
creating in Address Book, 125
discarding Address Book labels, 126
discarding Address Book labels on Web, 187
editing Address Book, 125
editing Address Book label on Web, 187
labels (Address Book)
about, 124
creating on the Web, 187
default, 125
edit on the Web, 187
light flasher notification, setting, 45
limits
Email mailbox, 107
length of a note, 156
length of photo name, 145
number of Address Book contacts, 117
number of calls held in Phone Log, 68
number of custom email folders, 102
number of image attachments to email, 145
number of notes you can store, 156
number of To Do tasks you can store, 147
open conversations in AIM, 82
To Do task notes, 150
To Do task title, 149
limits on attachments in outgoing email messages,
173
links in email, 92
list of tasks in To Do application, 148
locking
Alt key, 18
device, 41
shift key, 18
SIM card, 42
Log, number of calls held in Phone Log, 68
Look Up screen, in Phone application, 65
lost SIM
what to do, 29
M
managing Calendar events on the Web, 197
managing your Speed Dial list, 60
all in a folder, 92
individual message, 92
mark message as read/unread
individual message, 92
Mark Unread, Email Read menu item, 92
Match dialog box, 122
menu
Jump screen, 50
Menu button
about, 19
using to scroll in a menu, 20
using to scroll screen-by-screen, 20
menu shortcuts
Browse Contacts screen, 118
Browse Email screen, 90
Browse Messages screen, 110
Camera application, 141
Compose Message screen, 110
Compose screen, 90
Contact Info screen, 118
Email Settings screen, 90
POP3 accounts screen, 90
message
move to another folder, 93
message body
Compose Message screen, 112
Compose screen, 94
message on sleep screen
how to set up, 40
messages, sorting, 92
minimum info required to create a contact, 120
missed call icon, 69
modes
capturing images, 142
Month Calendar view
details, 137
summary, 133
moving email messages, 93
MSISDN number, 27
mute
button, 33
enabling, 45
schedule for regular times, 46
muting a phone call, 66
map a contact’s address, 122
mark message as read
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
225
Index
a Web page, 53
an email attachment on the Web, 171
Email message, 91
Jump screen menu, 50
phone message, 111
sound & display Controls, 33
the Jump screen, 49
N
network connection lost indicator, 16
network status, checking, 50
networks, selecting manually, 44
new AIM message alert, 78
New Category dialog box, 124
New Category, Address Book menu option, 124
New Note keyboard shortcut, 154
Notes application
adding a new note, 156
Browse All Notes screen, 154
discarding a note, 156
editing an existing note, 156
emptying the Trash, 157
folding notes, 154
folding/unfolding notes, 155
highlighting a note, 154
keyboard shortcuts to menu items, 154
length limit, 156
managing the Trash, 157
number limit, 156
retrieving a note from Trash, 157
sorting, 155
views, 154
Notes Web application
accessing, 212
adding a new note, 213
discarding a note, 213
editing a note, 213
emptying the trash, 214
retrieving a note, 214
notifications
setting for email, 105
number of Address Book contacts you can store,
117
numbers
IMSI, 27
MSISDN, 27
O
off, turning device off, 13
Offline group, AIM, 81
on/off button, 19
one dot in title bar, meaning, 16
opening
April 15, 2003
opening/closing display, 15
outgoing call icon, 69
out-of-network indicator, 74
P
password
changing for Web access, 216
selecting, 10
Password field, Accounts screen, 99
PDF file of user documentation, 167
PDF files, reading as attachments, 91
Phone application
adjusting volume in active call, 62
alpha key mapping, 64
answering calls, 67
Call Log, 68
call waiting behavior, 67
Caller ID, 67
clearing Call Log, 70
conference calling, 66
dialing from Phone Look Up screen, 65
editing an existing Speed Dial number, 61
ending a call, 67
keyboard shortcuts, 60
muting a call, 66
number of calls held in Log, 68
placing a call, 63
recent numbers, 64
removing a Speed Dial number, 62
resetting your call timer, 71
setting up ringtones, 72
settings, 70
Speed Dial setup, 73
splash screen, 59
title bar indicators, 60
turning off call forwarding, 72
using device as handset, 62
using headset, 62
voice mail, 70
phone call
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
226
Index
adjusting volume, 62
ending, 67
phone message
forwarding, 113
phone message (Phone Messages) folders, system,
109
Phone Message Inbox folder, about, 111
Phone Message Sent folder, about, 111
Phone Message Trash folder, about, 111
Phone Messages application
add text message sender to contacts, 113
calling a sender back on the phone, 114
discarding messages, 114
emptying Trash, 114
forwarding a message, 113
illegal characters in messages, 112
message folders, 111
reading a phone message, 111
replying to a message, 113
retrieving a message from the Trash, 115
sending a message, 112
Settings screen, 115
status indicators, 110
phone number of your device, 70
phone number, where to look up, 46
phoning, placing a call, 63
photo name length limit, 145
photos
attaching to Web Email messages, 173
capturing, 142
counter, 144
discarding, 146
discarding on the Web, 206
maximum device can store, 143
remaining, 144
renaming, 145
renaming on the Web, 206
selecting, 144
selecting all, 145
sorting, 146
sorting on the Web, 206
PIN for SIM card, 42
placing phone calls
placing a second call, 66
placing telephone calls
placing a call, 63
April 15, 2003
POP server field, Accounts screen, 99
POP3 accounts
adding to Email Web application, 178
collecting mail from, 180
deleting, 101
editing, 100
setting up, 98
POP3 accounts screen
menu shortcuts, 90
Port field, Accounts screen, 99
port, USB Mini-B, 26
pound (#) tone, entering while on a call, 65
power jack
illustration, 25
using, 11
powering the device on/off, 19
power-saving mode
enabling, 36
waking, 12
Preview capture mode, 142
preview screens
AIM, 74
primary email account
specifying on the device, 98
specifying on the Web, 178
privacy, 41
turn on/off for device, 41
privacy code, device, 41
privacy lock, setting, 41
R
radio signal strength indicator, 16
reading
a phone message, 111
an email message, 91
an email message on the Web, 171
recipient (of email)
add to Address Book, 96
Recovery ROM version number, where to view on
device, 46
redialing a number
Phone application, 64
Reference Guide, PDF file for printing, 9
refreshing a Web page, 52
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
227
Index
Registration screen, 10
Reminder dialog box, 130
reminder for an event, setting, 130
removing
AIM screen names, 77
Speed Dial number, 62
removing a SIM, 28
renaming
AIM group, 79
renaming a photo, 145
repeat rate, keyboard, 43
repeating events, setting, 130
Repetition dialog box, 130
replied to
email status indicator, 89
Reply All..., Email menu item, 95
Reply..., Email menu item, 95
replying
to a message, 95
replying to a text message, 113
replying to an email, 95
Reply-To Address field, Edit Accounts screen, 101
Reply-To Name field, Edit Accounts screen, 101
reporting a Web page that doesn’t display, 53
resetting your telephone call timer, 71
retrieve a text message from the Trash, 115
Retrieve Contact, Address Book menu option, 121
retrieving
a Calendar event from Trash, 138
a trashed note, 157
a trashed note on the Web, 214
a trashed task, 151
an Address Book contact, 121
ringtones
setting for email, 105
setting up for Phone, 72
roaming charges, about, 47
Rock & Rocket, how to play, 158
Save Folder field, Accounts screen, 99
Saved folder
about, 102
icon, 89
saving an email as draft, 95
saving outgoing email messages, 106
scan for networks, 44
scheduling mute times, 46
screen
backlighting, 18
protecting from damage, 12
screen identifier in title bar, 16
screen image
control, 33
screen names
adding, 75
removing, 77
switching, 77
scrolling
quickly in a menu, 20
screen-by-screen, 20
Web page, 52
search engine
set for Browser, 57
searching the Web, 53
second phone call, placing, 66
securing your device with a code, 41
selecting
all photos in Gallery, 145
an application from the Jump screen, 49
photos, 144
series of contiguous photos, 144
username and password during registration,
10
sender (of email)
add to Address Book, 95
sender (of text message)
add to Address Book, 113
sending
email message, 94
email messages on the Web, 172
text message, 112
sending email status indicator, 89
S
safety, while using device, 13
April 15, 2003
Sent folder, 106
about, 102
icon, 89
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
228
Index
setting up
call forwarding, 71
date & time on your device, 37
Jump shortcuts to applications, 38
keyboard repeat delay, 43
ringtones for Phone, 72
speed dialing, 73
time zones, 37
voice mail, 71
settings, 30
Address Book application, 123
device-wide, 30
Email application, 104
for Web applications, 215
Instant Messaging application, 84
Phone application, 70
Phone Messages application, 115
Web Browser application, 57
Settings on the Web
accessing, 215
shift key
lock, 18
unlock, 18
shortcuts
for changing views in Calendar, 132
in Phone application, 60
key mapping to open the applications, 39
to applications, 38
importing contacts from, 126
lock/unlock, 42
SIM ID, where to view number, 46
SIM Lock Code
where stored, 27
SIM PIN, default number, 28
size of Web Browser cache, 58
sleep mode
about, 12
Sort By..., Address Book menu option, 119
Sort Messages dialog box, 92
sorting
contacts in the Address Book, 119
email messages, 92
notes, 155
sound
enabling for AIM alerts, 85
setting up ringtones in Phone application, 72
turning off for device, 33
volume adjustment slider bar, 33
space limitations
Address Book contacts, 117
email messages, 107
length of a note, 156
length of photo name, 145
number of To Do tasks, 147
Show Pictures check box, 58
specific day, opening in Calendar, 139
Shuffle, how to play, 163
specify application-specific settings, 30
Speed Dial list
about, 60
assigning numbers, 73
managing, 60
Speed Dial number
editing, 61
shutter button, 143
signal strength indicator, 16
signature, email, 100
signing off
from AIM, 77
signing on
to AIM, 76
SIM
about swapping, 29
general information, 27
handling, 29
information saved on, 27
inserting, 28
lost! what to do, 29
removing, 28
what you can do on device without a SIM, 28
SIM card
about, 27
April 15, 2003
speed dialing, using to call, 64
splash screens
about, 49
Calendar application, 127
Email application, 87
Notes application, 153
Phone application, 59
To Do, 147
standby battery time, 12
star (*) tone, entering while on call, 65
Start Guide, PDF file for printing, 9
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
229
Index
starting an AIM conversation, 82
status
changing email to unread, 92
changing To Do task to completed/incomplete, 150
status indicators
attachment to email, 89
email, 89
error sending email, 89
forwarded email, 89
on Web pages, 51
Phone Messages, 110
replied to email, 89
sending email, 89
waiting to send email, 89
status, checking network, 50
Subject field, Compose screen, 94
swapping SIMs, 29
switching
conversations in AIM, 83
screen names in AIM, 77
system email folders, 88
system information, where located on your device,
46
system phone (Phone Messages) folders, 109
system sounds
adjusting volume, 46
definition, 46
T
task
creating a new task on the Web, 210
creating new, 149
discarding, 151
discarding completed tasks on the Web, 210
discarding on the Web, 210
editing on the Web, 210
emptying Trash on the Web, 211
incomplete, viewing on the Web, 209
marking as complete/incomplete on the Web,
210
marking as completed/incomplete, 150
notes (To Do) size limit, 150
retrieving a discarded task on the Web, 211
title (To Do) size limit, 149
viewing all on the Web, 209
viewing details, 149
April 15, 2003
views in To Do application, 151
Task Details screen, To Do application
about, 149
adding a note, 150
editing, 150
text cursors, meaning of shape, 26
text message
composing, 112
discarding, 113114
replying, 113
sending message, 112
text messages, where stored, 27
text, tips when typing, 26
three dots in title bar, meaning, 16
Thumbnail view, photo Gallery, 143
Time Zone
setting on the Web, 216
title bar
meaning of icons, 15
To Do application
adding a note to task details, 150
Browse Tasks screen, 148
creating a new task, 149
discarding a task, 151
editing a task, 150
emptying the Trash, 152
keyboard shortcuts, 148
limit on number of tasks, 147
limit to task notes, 150
limit to task title, 149
managing the Trash, 151
marking a task as completed/incomplete, 150
retrieving a task from Trash, 151
setting a due date, 149
splash screen, 147
Task Details screen, 149
task views, 151
using the date picker, 149
To Do Web application
accessing, 208209
adding a new task, 210
all tasks, viewing, 209
Browse Tasks page, 209
description of To Do items, 209
discarding a task, 210
discarding completed tasks, 210
editing a task, 210
emptying Trash, 211
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
230
Index
marking a task as complete/incomplete, 210
retrieving a discarded task, 211
viewing incomplete tasks, 209
To field
add new line, 94
Compose Message screen, 112
Email Compose screen, 94
today, opening in Calendar, 139
Trash
Address Book application, 122
emptying Calendar Web Trash, 203
emptying contents, Notes Web application,
214
emptying Notes Trash on the Web, 211
Notes application, 157
To Do application, 151
Trash (Email) folder
empty all contents, 97
Trash (Phone Messages) folder
empty all contents, 114
Trash (To Do), emptying, 152
Trash Calendar view
details, 138
Trash folder
about, 103
icon, 89
turning the device on/off, 19
turning wireless on/off, 47
two dots in title bar, meaning, 16
typing text tips, 26
U
unavailable
setting an AIM away message, 83
unblocking an AIM buddy, 81
unfolding/folding
all notes, 155
single note, 155
unlocking
Alt key, 18
device, 40
shift key, 18
SIM card, 28
your SIM card, 42
un-mute button, 33
unread emails
listed on splash screen, 87
April 15, 2003
unread text messages
listed on splash screen, 108
Upcoming Calendar view
details, 134
summary, 133
USB Mini-B port, 26
Use Current Page button, 57
user documentation
about, 167
printing, 167
user information
settings for Web applications, 216
user-defined folder icon, 89
Username field, Accounts screen, 99
username, selecting, 10
V
vibration
setting as device notification, 45
viewing all your Notes, 154
views
Call Log, 68
Day, details, 135
Day, summary, 133
Month, details, 137
Month, summary, 133
setting in To Do application, 151
Trash, details, 138
Upcoming, details, 134
Upcoming, summary, 133
Week, details, 136
Week, summary, 133
Year, details, 138
Year, summary, 134
views in Calendar application
about, 132
views in Calendar Web application
about, 197
Day view, 198
Month view, 198
Week view, 197
views of photo Gallery, 143
voice mail
calling, 70
setting up, 71
Speed Dial number, 60
volume
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
231
Index
adjusting system sounds, 33
adjusting when on the phone, 62
W
waiting to send email
status indicator, 89
waking device from power-saving mode, 12
Web
accessing device applications, 166
searching, 53
setting your home page, 57
setting your search engine, 57
showing pictures, 58
Web Browser application
reporting a bad URL, 53
Web Browser settings, 57
Web pages
opening, 53
refreshing, 52
reporting a problem with displaying a page, 53
scrolling, 52
status indicators, 51
Web settings
changing name display on emails, 216
device ID, 216
Time Zone, 216
user information, 216
Week Calendar view
details, 136
summary, 133
wheel, using, 22
Wireless Options
roaming charges, 47
turning roaming on/off, 47
wireless, turning on and off, 47
Word files, reading as attachment, 91
Y
Year Calendar view
details, 138
summary, 134
April 15, 2003
T-Mobile Sidekick Owner’s Manual
232